1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8371 environment is identical to
8375 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8388 \begin_layout Section
8389 Nesting Environments
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 Nesting ! Environments
8400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8409 \begin_layout Subsection
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8415 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8417 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8419 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8421 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8457 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8465 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8477 \begin_inset space ~
8482 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8484 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8507 arg "depth-increment"
8513 arg "depth-decrement"
8517 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8518 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8524 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8525 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8526 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8527 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8533 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8535 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8538 \begin_layout Subsection
8539 What You Can and Can't Nest
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8544 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8549 than a simple yes or no.
8550 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Completely unnestable
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8569 environments have them:
8572 \begin_layout Description
8573 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8574 Can't nest into them.
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Description
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8614 Nestable You can nest them.
8615 You can nest other things into them.
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Description
8682 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8683 You can't nest anything into them.
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8801 \begin_inset space ~
8804 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8805 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8806 nested section headings violate this.
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8815 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8816 \begin_inset Index idx
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8830 affected by nesting anyhow.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8856 Figures and tables in
8860 are not affected by this.
8865 Have a look at section
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8872 reference "sec:Floats"
8876 for more information about
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8885 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8886 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8899 of its own, it behaves just like a
8900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8907 paragraph environment.
8908 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 Here's an example with a table:
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 This is (a) and it's nested.
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Tabular
8936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 This is (a) and it's nested.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9056 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset Tabular
9065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9166 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9182 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9194 \begin_layout Standard
9195 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset Tabular
9204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9205 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 \begin_layout Standard
9313 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9319 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9320 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9324 \begin_layout Subsection
9325 Usage and General Features
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9330 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9339 is the innermost possible depth.
9340 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 level #1 – outermost
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Standard
9378 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9379 both of them in the example.
9380 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9390 For example, if we tried to nest another
9395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9402 , we would get errors.
9405 \begin_layout Subsection
9407 \begin_inset Index idx
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9420 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9421 We have several examples of nested environments.
9422 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9427 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #2-a This is level #2.
9444 We created it by using
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-a This is level #3.
9463 This time, we just enter
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9491 \begin_layout Standard
9496 environment, nested inside of
9497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9505 So, it's at level #4.
9506 We did this by entering
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9518 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9523 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9539 \begin_layout Standard
9544 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #4-a This is level #4.
9559 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9567 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9571 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9576 keep nesting things inside
9577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9598 and this is level #6.
9599 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 #5-b Back to level #5.
9609 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9615 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 \begin_layout Labeling
9623 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 , we're back at level #4.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #3-b Back to level #3.
9643 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9647 \begin_layout Labeling
9648 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #2-b Back to level #2.
9654 \begin_layout Labeling
9655 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9657 After this sentence, we will enter
9661 and change the paragraph environment back to
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We could have also used the
9685 environment in place of the
9690 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9694 Example 2: Inheritance
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9698 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9710 arg "depth-increment"
9714 \begin_inset Newline newline
9717 which, we will change to the
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 environment, at level #2.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 Notice how the nested
9738 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9742 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 We ended this example by entering
9752 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9756 and reset the nesting depth by using
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9766 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9775 \begin_inset Argument 1
9778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 This is level #1, in an
9792 paragraph environment.
9793 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9812 Now, what happens if we nest an
9816 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9817 label be? An asterisk?
9821 \begin_layout Itemize
9831 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9832 So, its label is a bullet.
9833 (We got here by using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9845 , then changing the environment to
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Here's level #4, produced using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9880 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9884 , because we are in the
9892 environment (that is, it is an
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9913 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 to decrease the depth after the next
9937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9954 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9968 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9973 reset the counter for the label.
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-decrement"
9990 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9991 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9992 into the twofold-nested
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10001 The same thing happens if we do another
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-decrement"
10013 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10022 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10033 The number of other
10037 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 The same rule applies for the
10048 environment, as well.
10051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10052 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10057 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10058 the same detail with how we did it.
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10075 arg "depth-increment"
10082 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10083 the example in parentheses someplace.
10084 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10085 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10086 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10157 \begin_layout Standard
10159 \begin_inset Tabular
10160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Verse
10252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "depth-decrement"
10289 \begin_layout Enumerate
10294 : level #1) This is another item.
10295 Note that selecting a
10299 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10300 3 times to put the table inside the
10308 \begin_layout Quotation
10309 We're now ending the
10313 list and changing to
10318 We're still at level #1.
10319 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10320 The next set of paragraphs is a
10321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10328 We will nest both the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10340 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10344 for the letter body.
10348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10351 to preserve the depth.
10352 Remember that you need to use
10355 arg "newline-insert newline"
10358 to create multiple lines inside the
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Right Address
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10380 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10381 \begin_inset Newline newline
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10400 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10401 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10402 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10403 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10404 as soon as possible.
10405 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10410 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10411 with your order, along with payment.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We thank you again for your patience.
10418 \begin_layout Address
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 \begin_layout Quotation
10428 That ends that example!
10431 \begin_layout Standard
10432 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10433 gives you a lot of power with just
10435 We could have easily nested an
10456 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10459 \begin_layout Subsection
10461 \begin_inset Index idx
10464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 Nesting ! Separation
10471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10473 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10483 For example you need two different enumerations:
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset Separator plain
10507 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10534 list item and use the menu
10536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 Start New Environment
10540 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10541 ) and behind it the new list.
10544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10545 Start New Parent Environment
10547 only appears if the item is nested.
10548 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10554 (red arrow in LyX).
10555 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10556 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10563 arg "paragraph-break"
10570 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10573 \begin_layout Section
10574 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10575 \begin_inset Index idx
10578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10587 \begin_layout Standard
10588 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10589 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10591 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10592 be broken at the end of a line.
10593 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10597 \begin_layout Subsection
10599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10601 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10606 \begin_inset Index idx
10609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10619 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10620 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10621 ) not to break the line at
10623 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10626 \begin_layout Quote
10627 Further documentation is given in section
10628 \begin_inset Newline newline
10632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10634 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10643 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10658 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10667 A protected space is set with
10669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10670 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10672 \begin_inset space ~
10680 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10686 \begin_layout Subsection
10688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10690 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10695 \begin_inset Index idx
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10699 Spacing ! Horizontal
10707 \begin_layout Standard
10708 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10715 The length units are listed in Appendix
10716 \begin_inset space ~
10720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10722 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10733 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10738 \begin_inset Index idx
10741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10742 Spaces ! Inter-word
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10752 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10753 at the ends of sentences.
10754 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10755 automatically takes care about this.
10756 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10757 followed by a period; see section
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10764 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10769 To insert a normal space, select
10771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10782 arg "space-insert normal"
10788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10792 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10797 \begin_inset Index idx
10800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10818 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10828 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10829 inside abbreviations:
10832 \begin_layout Quote
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10838 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 or between values and units.
10843 Compare for example this:
10844 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10852 \begin_inset Newline newline
10855 10 kg (normal space
10858 \begin_layout Standard
10859 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 \begin_inset space ~
10872 arg "space-insert thin"
10878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10882 \begin_layout Standard
10883 You can also insert the following space types:
10886 \begin_layout Description
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10895 space A line with a
10896 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10900 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10904 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10907 negative thin space between the arrows.
10910 \begin_layout Description
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10919 space A line with a
10920 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10924 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10928 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10931 negative medium space between the arrows.
10934 \begin_layout Description
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10943 space A line with a
10944 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10948 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10952 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10955 negative thick space between the arrows.
10958 \begin_layout Description
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10972 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10976 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10987 em) space between the arrows.
10990 \begin_layout Description
10992 \begin_inset space ~
10996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11004 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11008 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11012 \begin_inset space ~
11016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11019 em) space between the arrows.
11022 \begin_layout Description
11024 \begin_inset space ~
11028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11036 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11044 \begin_inset space ~
11048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 em) space between the arrows.
11054 \begin_layout Description
11056 \begin_inset space ~
11060 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11064 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 cm space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11087 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11091 lists the different space sizes.
11094 \begin_layout Standard
11095 \begin_inset Float table
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11106 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11110 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 \begin_inset Tabular
11121 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11122 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11240 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11399 \begin_inset Index idx
11402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11411 \begin_layout Standard
11412 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11413 feature for adding extra space
11414 in a uniform fashion.
11415 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11416 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11417 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11418 equally between themselves.
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11425 \begin_layout Quote
11427 This is on the left side
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 This is on the right
11434 \begin_layout Quote
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Quote
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_layout Standard
11465 That was an example in the
11471 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11475 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11479 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11482 is one in a standard paragraph.
11483 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11487 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11499 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11504 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11508 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11516 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11520 \begin_inset space ~
11526 \begin_layout Standard
11528 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11532 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_layout Standard
11540 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11544 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_layout Standard
11552 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11556 \begin_inset space ~
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11564 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11568 \begin_inset space ~
11574 \begin_layout Standard
11575 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11587 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11589 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11590 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11594 option in the space dialog.
11602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11606 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11611 \begin_inset Index idx
11614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11625 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11628 \begin_layout Standard
11629 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11632 What is correct English?:
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11644 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11645 \begin_inset Newline newline
11649 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11660 \begin_inset Newline newline
11664 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11681 \begin_layout Standard
11683 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11700 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11707 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11724 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11733 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11734 That is why it is named
11735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11743 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11744 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11748 \begin_layout Subsection
11750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11752 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11757 \begin_inset Index idx
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11770 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11781 There you find the following sizes:
11784 \begin_layout Standard
11797 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11798 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11803 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11808 \begin_inset space ~
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 Document ! Settings
11823 for the paragraph separation.
11824 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11835 \begin_layout Standard
11841 \begin_inset Index idx
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11850 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11851 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11856 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11857 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11866 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 s are described in section
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11882 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11891 If there are several
11895 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11896 You can therefore use
11900 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11908 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11915 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11922 \begin_layout Standard
11923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11934 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11946 \begin_layout Subsection
11947 Paragraph Alignment
11948 \begin_inset Index idx
11951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11952 Paragraph ! Alignment
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11963 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11966 dialog (toolbar button
11969 arg "layout-paragraph"
11973 There are five possibilities:
11976 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11990 \begin_layout Itemize
11998 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12004 \begin_layout Itemize
12012 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12018 \begin_layout Itemize
12026 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12032 \begin_layout Itemize
12040 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12047 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12048 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12049 the left and right margins.
12050 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 This paragraph is right aligned,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is centered,
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12065 this one is left aligned.
12068 \begin_layout Subsection
12070 \begin_inset Index idx
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 Page breaks ! Forced
12080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12082 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12090 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12092 force a page break where you want one.
12093 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12094 is good at page breaking.
12095 Only if you use a lot of
12099 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12105 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12109 have to change the page breaking.
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12115 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12129 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 \begin_inset space ~
12136 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12138 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12139 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12142 \begin_layout Standard
12143 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12144 at the top of a page.
12145 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12147 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12148 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12149 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12153 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12157 to learn more about
12164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12177 Page breaks ! Clear
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12186 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12187 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12188 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12189 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12190 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12205 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12219 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12220 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12223 \begin_layout Subsection
12225 \begin_inset Index idx
12228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12237 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12247 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12264 arg "newline-insert newline"
12268 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12285 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12288 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12290 This is useful to avoid
12291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12298 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12302 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12303 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12305 very good at line breaking.
12306 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12307 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12314 reference "sec:Quote"
12319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12321 reference "sec:Verse"
12326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12328 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12335 \begin_layout Subsection
12337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12339 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12344 \begin_inset Index idx
12347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12356 \begin_layout Standard
12358 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12374 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12376 \begin_inset space ~
12381 you can insert horizontal lines.
12382 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12383 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12384 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12389 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12400 \begin_layout Section
12401 Characters and Symbols
12404 \begin_layout Standard
12405 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12406 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12407 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12415 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12419 for information on how this is done.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12428 dialog via the menu
12430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12431 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 \begin_layout Standard
12438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12447 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12449 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12457 \begin_layout Section
12458 Fonts and Text Styles
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12461 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12468 \begin_layout Subsection
12470 \begin_inset Index idx
12473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12482 \begin_layout Standard
12483 There are two types of fonts:
12486 \begin_layout Description
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12492 \begin_inset Index idx
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12506 characters) in the font.
12507 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12508 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12509 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12510 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12511 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12512 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12513 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12514 \begin_inset Newline newline
12517 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12518 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12519 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12520 sizes than at small ones.
12521 \begin_inset Newline newline
12535 \begin_inset space ~
12543 \begin_layout Description
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_inset Index idx
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12558 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12559 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12560 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12561 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12562 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12563 image manipulation program.
12564 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12565 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels high up to 34
12570 \begin_inset space ~
12573 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12574 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12575 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12577 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12578 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12579 \begin_inset Newline newline
12582 Bitmap fonts are named
12585 \begin_inset space ~
12590 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12593 \begin_layout Standard
12594 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12595 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12596 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12597 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12598 use scalable fonts.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12605 \begin_layout Standard
12606 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12607 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12608 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12609 font to emphasize text, you use an
12610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12618 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12620 In \SpecialChar LyX
12621 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12625 \begin_layout Subsection
12628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12630 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12637 \begin_layout Standard
12638 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 used its own fonts.
12640 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12641 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12646 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12647 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12648 to a word processor.
12649 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12650 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 files are very portable across
12652 different machines.
12653 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12654 has increased a lot
12655 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12658 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12666 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12671 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 code in the document
12673 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12678 engines that are also able directly
12679 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12681 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12683 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12685 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12686 that is installed on your system.
12687 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12699 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12700 es; so you might have to experiment.
12708 \begin_layout Subsection
12709 Document Font and Font size
12710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12712 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12717 \begin_inset Index idx
12720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12727 \begin_inset Index idx
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12740 You can set the document fonts in the
12742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12746 \begin_inset Index idx
12749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 Document ! Settings
12760 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12761 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12764 \begin_inset space ~
12773 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12778 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12781 \begin_layout Standard
12786 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12787 This requires that you use
12799 as the output format, i.
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12804 \begin_inset space \space{}
12807 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12808 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12809 installed (see section
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12816 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12821 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12823 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12824 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12826 \begin_inset space ~
12829 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12830 cannot determine the family.
12831 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12832 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12835 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12838 \begin_layout Standard
12839 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12840 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12845 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12851 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12852 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 European Computer Modern
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12889 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12892 \begin_layout Standard
12901 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12902 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12907 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12915 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12921 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12922 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12925 \begin_layout Itemize
12929 \begin_inset space ~
12934 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12947 \begin_inset space ~
12952 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12953 community in order to replace
12957 as the default font.
12958 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12959 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12976 One difference is improved kerning.
12984 \begin_layout Itemize
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12997 fonts in (the rare) case that
13000 \begin_inset space ~
13005 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13020 Virtual means that it
13021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13032 -glyphs from other fonts.
13033 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13061 \begin_inset Index idx
13064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13071 with the document preamble line
13072 \begin_inset Newline newline
13079 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13080 \begin_inset Newline newline
13085 will fix the guillemet problem.
13090 and that accented characters are not
13094 glyph, but built of
13098 characters, the accent and the letter.
13099 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13105 If you search for example for the French word
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13113 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13122 and not for the glyph
13123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13137 \begin_layout Itemize
13138 If you do not like the look of
13146 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13157 \begin_inset space ~
13167 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13171 serif and typewriter fonts,
13175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13176 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13183 \begin_inset space ~
13192 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13197 \begin_inset space \space{}
13205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13209 \begin_inset space \space{}
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13233 but you can also select your own.
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13237 The differences between roman,
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13249 fonts are explained in section
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13261 \begin_inset Newline newline
13267 \begin_inset space ~
13272 was originally designed for newspapers.
13273 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13274 into the small newspaper columns.
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13283 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13286 \begin_layout Standard
13287 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13300 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13305 depends on the class you are using.
13306 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13309 \begin_layout Standard
13310 Note that the font size is the
13315 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13316 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13317 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13318 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13321 \begin_inset space ~
13327 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13334 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13341 \begin_layout Standard
13345 \begin_inset space ~
13350 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13352 \begin_inset space ~
13355 serif or typewriter.
13360 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13370 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13373 \begin_layout Standard
13378 LaTeX font encoding
13380 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13381 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13387 \begin_inset Index idx
13390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13398 \begin_inset space ~
13402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13404 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13409 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13410 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13417 \begin_layout Standard
13418 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13420 Use Old Style Figures
13424 Use True Small Caps
13427 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13430 Use Old Style Figures
13432 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13434 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13442 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13446 Use True Small Caps
13448 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13449 of scaled capitals.
13450 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13451 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13454 \begin_layout Standard
13459 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13460 a font to display the script characters.
13464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13465 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13471 \begin_inset Index idx
13474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13481 So this has no effect for the document language
13495 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13499 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13507 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13512 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13513 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13515 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13520 dialog, see section
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13527 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13539 \begin_layout Subsection
13543 \begin_layout Standard
13544 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13545 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13547 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13548 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13549 choose a math font in the dialog
13551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13555 \begin_inset Index idx
13558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13559 Document ! Settings
13565 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13566 automatically selects a math font.
13567 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13568 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13577 \begin_inset space ~
13583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13588 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13589 document font is available.
13592 \begin_layout Standard
13593 Note that the math font will not be used for
13597 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13603 or by the insertion of the command
13610 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13615 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13616 while the math characters do not.
13618 \begin_inset space ~
13621 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13632 \begin_inset space ~
13637 in the document font settings.
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13641 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13642 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13643 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13644 font (in most cases
13645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13651 \begin_inset space ~
13657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13660 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13661 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13669 \begin_inset space ~
13675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13681 \begin_layout Subsection
13682 Using Different Character Styles
13683 \begin_inset Index idx
13686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13693 \begin_inset Index idx
13696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13705 \begin_layout Standard
13706 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13707 automatically changes the character style for certain
13708 paragraph environments.
13710 supports two character styles,
13719 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13723 \begin_layout Standard
13728 style, do one of the following:
13731 \begin_layout Itemize
13732 click on the toolbar button
13741 \begin_layout Itemize
13742 use the key binding
13751 \begin_layout Standard
13752 These commands are all toggles.
13757 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 One typically uses the
13765 style for proper names.
13767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13774 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13782 \begin_layout Standard
13783 A more widely used character style is the
13788 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13795 \begin_layout Itemize
13796 clicking on the toolbar button
13805 \begin_layout Itemize
13806 using the keybindings
13815 \begin_layout Standard
13820 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13822 use a different font.
13825 \begin_layout Standard
13826 We've been using the
13830 style all over the place in this document.
13831 Here's one more example:
13834 \begin_layout Quotation
13837 Do not overuse character styles!
13840 \begin_layout Standard
13841 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13842 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13843 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13844 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13849 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13859 \begin_inset space ~
13862 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13868 arg "dialog-show character"
13874 \begin_layout Subsection
13875 Fine-Tuning with the
13880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13882 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13887 \begin_inset Index idx
13890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13899 \begin_layout Standard
13900 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13902 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13903 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13904 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13905 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13906 from ordinary dialog.
13909 \begin_layout Standard
13910 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13911 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13912 \begin_inset Newline newline
13915 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13916 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13919 \begin_layout Standard
13920 To use custom character styles, open the
13922 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13924 \begin_inset space ~
13927 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13930 dialog or press the toolbar button
13933 arg "dialog-show character"
13937 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13938 font property that you can choose.
13939 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13942 \begin_inset space ~
13947 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13952 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13953 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13954 environments all at once.
13957 \begin_layout Standard
13958 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13961 \begin_inset space ~
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13988 The possible options are:
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 This is the Roman font family.
13999 Normally a serif font.
14000 It's also the default family.
14010 \begin_layout Labeling
14011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 \begin_inset space ~
14022 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14034 \begin_layout Labeling
14035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14042 This is the Typewriter font family.
14048 arg "font-typewriter"
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14063 This corresponds to the print weight.
14068 \begin_layout Labeling
14069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14074 This is the Medium font series.
14075 It's also the default series.
14078 \begin_layout Labeling
14079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14086 This is the Bold font series.
14099 \begin_layout Labeling
14100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14105 As the name implies.
14110 \begin_layout Labeling
14111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14116 This is the Upright font shape.
14117 It's also the default shape.
14120 \begin_layout Labeling
14121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14135 s the Italic font shape
14141 \begin_layout Labeling
14142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14149 This is the Slanted font shape
14151 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14152 , this is different from italic).
14155 \begin_layout Labeling
14156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14160 \begin_inset space ~
14167 This is the Small caps font shape
14174 \begin_layout Labeling
14175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14180 Alters the text color.
14181 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14185 \begin_inset space ~
14190 , which means that the document default color set in
14192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14193 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14199 \begin_inset space ~
14204 is used, you can choose between
14281 \begin_inset Index idx
14284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14293 \begin_layout Labeling
14294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14299 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14300 the language of the document.
14301 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14302 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14304 \begin_inset Newline newline
14307 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14309 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14310 When using the spell checking (see section
14311 \begin_inset space ~
14315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14317 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14321 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14324 \begin_layout Labeling
14325 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 Alters the size of the font.
14331 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14332 proportional to the document font size.
14333 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14334 the details, but a general description of what
14340 \begin_layout Labeling
14341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14362 arg "font-size tiny"
14368 \begin_layout Labeling
14369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14390 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14396 \begin_layout Labeling
14397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14418 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14424 \begin_layout Labeling
14425 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14446 arg "font-size small"
14452 \begin_layout Labeling
14453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 It's also the default size.
14471 arg "font-size normal"
14477 \begin_layout Labeling
14478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14499 arg "font-size large"
14505 \begin_layout Labeling
14506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size larger"
14533 \begin_layout Labeling
14534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14555 arg "font-size largest"
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14583 arg "font-size huge"
14589 \begin_layout Labeling
14590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 arg "font-size giant"
14617 \begin_layout Labeling
14618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14623 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14643 arg "font-size increase"
14649 \begin_layout Labeling
14650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14655 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14675 arg "font-size decrease"
14682 \begin_layout Standard
14687 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14688 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14690 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14691 — use those instead.
14692 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14695 \begin_layout Labeling
14696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14701 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14706 \begin_layout Labeling
14707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14714 This is text with emphasize on
14717 This might seem like the same as
14721 , but it is actually a bit different.
14727 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14729 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14732 \begin_layout Labeling
14733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14740 This is text with Underbar on.
14746 arg "font-underline"
14752 \begin_inset Newline newline
14757 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14758 when you could not change fonts.
14759 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14760 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14761 because some people
14765 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14768 \begin_layout Labeling
14769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 This is text with Double underbar on.
14786 arg "font-underunderline"
14790 \begin_inset Newline newline
14793 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14794 about double underbar.
14797 \begin_layout Labeling
14798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14802 \begin_inset space ~
14809 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14815 arg "font-underwave"
14819 \begin_inset Newline newline
14822 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14823 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14826 \begin_layout Labeling
14827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14834 This is text with Strikeout on.
14840 arg "font-strikeout"
14844 \begin_inset Newline newline
14847 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14848 changed in the meantime.
14851 \begin_layout Labeling
14852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14859 This is text with Noun on.
14866 , this is a logical attribute.
14867 Normally it's equivalent to
14870 \begin_inset space ~
14879 \begin_layout Standard
14880 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14881 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14885 \begin_inset space ~
14888 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14894 arg "dialog-show character"
14897 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14898 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14901 arg "textstyle-apply"
14905 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14910 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14917 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14918 (suppose you just set the shape to
14919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14937 \begin_inset space ~
14949 \begin_layout Standard
14950 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14958 \begin_inset space ~
14970 \begin_layout Itemize
14976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14983 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15001 \begin_inset Newline newline
15005 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15019 \begin_inset Note Note
15022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15023 For more on phantoms see section
15024 \begin_inset space ~
15028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15030 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15040 \begin_inset Newline newline
15046 \begin_layout Itemize
15051 fonts use characters with serifs.
15052 These are the small
15053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15060 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15061 The following example shows the difference:
15062 \begin_inset Newline newline
15066 \begin_inset Newline newline
15071 text without serifs
15074 \begin_inset Newline newline
15077 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15078 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15085 \begin_layout Itemize
15090 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15091 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15092 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15095 \begin_layout Standard
15096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15103 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15104 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15107 \begin_inset space ~
15112 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15113 the property to be removed.
15114 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15115 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15116 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15134 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15135 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15143 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15147 \begin_inset space ~
15152 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15163 If you, for example, set
15164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15182 \begin_inset space ~
15187 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15196 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15199 \begin_layout Standard
15200 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15201 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15204 \begin_layout Section
15205 Printing and Previewing
15208 \begin_layout Subsection
15212 \begin_layout Standard
15213 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15214 using \SpecialChar LyX
15215 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15216 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15217 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15218 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15220 Additional Features
15225 \begin_layout Standard
15227 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15230 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15231 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15232 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15235 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15236 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15237 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15238 to turn your writing into printable output.
15239 This happens in two stages:
15242 \begin_layout Enumerate
15243 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15244 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15246 a file with the extension,
15247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15261 \begin_layout Enumerate
15262 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15263 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 to use the commands in the
15268 file to produce printable output.
15271 \begin_layout Subsection
15272 Output file formats
15273 \begin_inset Index idx
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15285 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15293 Simple text (ASCII)
15294 \begin_inset Index idx
15297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15298 File formats ! ASCII
15306 \begin_layout Standard
15307 This file type has the extension
15308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15324 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 \begin_layout Standard
15332 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15334 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15337 \begin_inset space ~
15343 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15344 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15345 bibliography (section
15346 \begin_inset space ~
15350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15352 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15357 If your document includes such material, use
15359 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15360 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15366 \begin_inset space ~
15370 \begin_inset space ~
15378 \begin_inset space ~
15382 \begin_inset space ~
15388 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15389 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15395 \begin_inset Index idx
15398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15399 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 \begin_layout Standard
15409 This file type has the extension
15410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15421 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15424 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 -Errors or to process it manually
15427 with console commands.
15428 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15429 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15430 's temporary directory whenever you
15431 view or export your document.
15434 \begin_layout Standard
15435 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15436 -file using the menu
15438 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15439 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15443 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15444 export variants are explained in section
15445 \begin_inset space ~
15449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15451 reference "subsec:Export"
15458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15460 \begin_inset Index idx
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 \begin_layout Standard
15473 This file type has the extension
15474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15495 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15496 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15500 \begin_layout Standard
15501 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15502 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15503 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15504 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15505 when you view the DVI.
15506 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15509 \begin_layout Standard
15510 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15512 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15513 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15521 \begin_inset space ~
15527 The latter option uses the program
15529 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15538 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15539 font access (see section
15540 \begin_inset space ~
15544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15546 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15551 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15552 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15559 \begin_inset Index idx
15562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15563 File formats ! PostScript
15571 \begin_layout Standard
15572 This file type has the extension
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15585 PostScript was developed by the company
15589 as a printer language.
15590 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15592 PostScript can be seen as a
15593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 programming language
15597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15600 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15605 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15612 \begin_inset Index idx
15615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15617 packages ! pstricks
15627 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15630 \begin_layout Standard
15631 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15635 Encapsulated PostScript
15636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15639 (EPS, file extension
15640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 As \SpecialChar LyX
15653 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15654 convert them in the background to EPS.
15655 If, for example, you have 50
15656 \begin_inset space ~
15659 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15661 \begin_inset space ~
15664 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15665 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15667 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15668 EPS to avoid this problem.
15671 \begin_layout Standard
15672 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15674 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15675 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15683 \begin_inset Index idx
15686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15693 \begin_inset Index idx
15696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15705 \begin_layout Standard
15706 This file type has the extension
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Portable Document Format
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15731 was derived from PostScript.
15732 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15741 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15742 looks exactly the same.
15745 \begin_layout Standard
15746 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15750 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15754 (JPG, file extension
15755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15782 Portable Network Graphics
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15786 (PNG, file extension
15787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15799 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15800 converts them in the
15801 background to one of these formats.
15802 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15803 will slow down your workflow.
15804 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15807 \begin_layout Standard
15808 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15810 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15816 \begin_layout Description
15818 \begin_inset space ~
15821 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 \begin_layout Description
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15837 ) This uses the program
15839 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15842 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15845 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15848 is a new engine, derived from
15852 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15853 access (see section
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15860 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15865 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15866 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15871 \begin_layout Description
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15880 ) This uses the program
15885 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15891 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15892 font access (see section
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15899 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15904 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15905 vertically written Japanese.
15908 \begin_layout Description
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15913 (cropped) This is the same as
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15921 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15922 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15923 to generate good-looking
15924 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15927 \begin_layout Description
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15932 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15936 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15940 \begin_layout Description
15942 \begin_inset space ~
15945 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15949 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15950 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15954 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15955 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15958 \begin_layout Standard
15962 \begin_inset space ~
15971 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15972 works without problems.
15973 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15974 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15978 \begin_inset space ~
15986 \begin_inset space ~
15991 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16001 \begin_inset Index idx
16004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16005 FileFormats ! XHTML
16011 \begin_inset Index idx
16014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 This file type has the extension
16025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16037 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16038 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16039 When \SpecialChar LyX
16040 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16041 suitable for the purpose.
16042 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16048 between different formats, which are described in section
16050 Math Output in XHTML
16055 \begin_inset space ~
16063 \begin_layout Standard
16064 XHTML output remains
16065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16072 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16073 features are supported yet.
16077 and the World Wide Web
16081 Additional Features
16083 manual, for more information.
16086 \begin_layout Standard
16087 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16089 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16090 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16096 \begin_layout Subsection
16098 \begin_inset Index idx
16101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16110 \begin_layout Standard
16111 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16112 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16121 or use the toolbar button
16128 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16129 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16130 \begin_inset space ~
16134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16136 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16140 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16142 \begin_inset space ~
16146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16148 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16153 Further output formats can be selected via
16155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16156 View (Other Formats)
16158 or the toolbar button
16167 \begin_layout Standard
16168 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16169 viewer window using the menu
16171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16177 Update (Other Formats)
16182 \begin_layout Standard
16183 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16186 To have a real output, export your document.
16189 \begin_layout Section
16190 A few Words about Typography
16191 \begin_inset Index idx
16194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16203 \begin_layout Subsection
16204 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16205 \begin_inset Index idx
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16215 \begin_inset Index idx
16218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 \begin_layout Standard
16228 In \SpecialChar LyX
16230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16241 character comes in four lengths: the
16253 , and the minus sign:
16254 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16260 \begin_layout Standard
16261 \begin_inset Tabular
16262 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16263 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16264 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16267 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16336 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16363 \begin_inset space ~
16366 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16400 \begin_inset space ~
16403 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16464 \begin_layout Standard
16465 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 character multiple times in a row.
16478 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16479 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16512 \begin_layout Standard
16513 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16514 math mode and has a length of its own.
16515 Here are some examples:
16518 \begin_layout Enumerate
16519 line- and page-breaks
16520 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16530 \begin_layout Enumerate
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Enumerate
16543 Oh — there's a dash.
16544 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16554 \begin_layout Enumerate
16555 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16559 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16569 \begin_layout Subsection
16571 \begin_inset Index idx
16574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16583 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16590 \begin_layout Standard
16591 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16592 but automatically in the output.
16593 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16599 \begin_inset Index idx
16602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 following the rules of the document language.
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16614 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16618 font and with unusual constructs, like
16619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16627 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16628 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16629 This is done with the menu
16631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16632 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16634 \begin_inset space ~
16640 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16642 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16646 \begin_layout Standard
16647 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16648 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16659 would then see the hyphen
16660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16667 as a hyphenation possibility.
16668 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16669 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16670 as described in section
16672 Prevent Hyphenation
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16685 \begin_layout Subsection
16687 \begin_inset Index idx
16690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16700 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16703 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 When \SpecialChar LyX
16712 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16713 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16715 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16721 appropriate amount of space.
16722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16725 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16727 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16728 gets after another word.
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16733 not work in all cases.
16735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16746 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16747 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16750 \begin_layout Standard
16751 Here are some examples of
16755 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16758 \begin_layout Itemize
16763 \begin_layout Itemize
16768 \begin_layout Standard
16769 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16772 \begin_layout Itemize
16774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16778 this is too much space!
16781 \begin_layout Itemize
16786 \begin_layout Standard
16787 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16794 \begin_layout Enumerate
16798 \begin_inset space ~
16803 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16810 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16815 \begin_inset Index idx
16818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16819 Spaces ! inter-word
16827 \begin_layout Enumerate
16831 \begin_inset space ~
16836 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16843 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16848 \begin_inset Index idx
16851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16860 \begin_layout Enumerate
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16881 \begin_inset space ~
16886 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16887 This function is also bound to
16890 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16896 \begin_layout Standard
16897 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16900 \begin_layout Itemize
16902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16906 \begin_inset space \space{}
16909 this is too much space!
16912 \begin_layout Itemize
16913 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16917 \begin_layout Standard
16918 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16919 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16921 will take care of this.
16924 \begin_layout Standard
16925 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16929 \begin_inset space ~
16935 feature described in the section
16937 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16942 Additional Features
16947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16949 \begin_inset Index idx
16952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16953 Typography ! Quotation marks
16959 \begin_inset Index idx
16962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 Quotation marks | see
16967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16993 \begin_layout Standard
16995 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
16996 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
16997 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17007 The keyboard character,
17011 , generates this automatically.
17014 \begin_layout Standard
17015 You can specify what character the
17019 key produces by using the submenu
17025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17029 \begin_inset Index idx
17032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17033 Document ! Settings
17038 dialog and switching the
17042 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17043 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17045 \begin_inset space ~
17051 \begin_layout Labeling
17052 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17064 \begin_inset space ~
17068 \begin_inset space ~
17072 \begin_inset Quotes els
17076 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 \begin_inset Quotes els
17094 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17097 quotation marks (as common, e.
17098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17104 \begin_layout Labeling
17105 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17108 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17112 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17128 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17134 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17138 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17142 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17146 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17149 quotation marks (as common, e.
17150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17156 \begin_layout Labeling
17157 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17160 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17164 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17180 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17186 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17190 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17194 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17198 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17201 quotation marks (as common, e.
17202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17208 \begin_layout Labeling
17209 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17212 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17216 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17232 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17238 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17242 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17246 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17250 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17253 quotation marks (as common, e.
17254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17260 \begin_layout Labeling
17261 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17264 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17268 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17272 \begin_inset space ~
17276 \begin_inset space ~
17280 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17284 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17290 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17294 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17298 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17302 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17305 quotation marks (as common, e.
17306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17309 g., in Switzerland)
17312 \begin_layout Labeling
17313 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17316 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17320 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17324 \begin_inset space ~
17328 \begin_inset space ~
17332 \begin_inset Quotes als
17336 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17342 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17346 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17350 \begin_inset Quotes als
17354 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17357 quotation marks (as common, e.
17358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17364 \begin_layout Labeling
17365 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17368 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17372 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_inset space ~
17384 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17388 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17394 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17402 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17406 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17409 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17412 \begin_layout Labeling
17413 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17416 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17420 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17424 \begin_inset space ~
17428 \begin_inset space ~
17432 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17436 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17442 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17446 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17450 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17454 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17457 quotation marks (as common, e.
17458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17461 g., in Great Britain)
17464 \begin_layout Labeling
17465 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17468 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17476 \begin_inset space ~
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17484 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17488 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17494 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17498 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17502 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17506 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17509 quotation marks (as common, e.
17510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17516 \begin_layout Labeling
17517 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17520 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17524 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17532 \begin_inset space ~
17536 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17540 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17546 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17558 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17561 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17566 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17567 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17568 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17569 the inner marks differ).
17577 \begin_layout Labeling
17578 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17581 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17585 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17589 \begin_inset space ~
17593 \begin_inset space ~
17597 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17601 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17607 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17611 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17615 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17619 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17622 quotation marks (as common, e.
17623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17629 \begin_layout Labeling
17630 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17633 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17637 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17641 \begin_inset space ~
17645 \begin_inset space ~
17649 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17653 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17659 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17663 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17667 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17671 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17674 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17677 \begin_layout Labeling
17678 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17687 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17703 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17711 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17715 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17719 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17723 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17727 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17730 quotation marks (as common, e.
17731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17739 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17740 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17748 \begin_layout Labeling
17749 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17750 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17758 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17768 \begin_inset space ~
17774 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17782 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17786 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17790 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17794 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17798 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17801 quotation marks (as common, e.
17802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17805 g., in North Korea and China)
17809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17810 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17811 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17819 \begin_layout Standard
17820 Inner quotation marks
17824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17825 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17826 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17827 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17835 does not necessarily mean
17836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17844 This is why we call them
17845 \begin_inset Quotes els
17849 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17865 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17867 \begin_inset Quotes els
17871 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17874 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
17877 arg "quote-insert inner"
17882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17888 \begin_layout Standard
17889 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
17890 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
17891 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
17892 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
17893 If you check the setting
17895 Use dynamic quotation marks
17899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17903 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
17904 they appear in a special color).
17905 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
17906 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
17908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17911 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
17914 \begin_layout Standard
17915 Individual quotation marks (i.
17916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17919 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
17920 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
17924 \begin_layout Subsection
17926 \begin_inset Index idx
17929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17930 Typography ! Ligatures
17936 \begin_inset Index idx
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17970 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17977 \begin_layout Standard
17978 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17979 print them as single characters.
17980 These groups are known as
17985 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17986 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17988 Here are the standard ligatures:
17991 \begin_layout Itemize
17995 \begin_layout Itemize
17999 \begin_layout Itemize
18003 \begin_layout Itemize
18007 \begin_layout Itemize
18011 \begin_layout Standard
18012 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18015 \begin_layout Standard
18016 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18017 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18025 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18041 To break a ligature, use
18043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18044 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18046 \begin_inset space ~
18053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18064 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18081 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 \begin_layout Subsection
18091 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18093 \begin_inset Index idx
18096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18106 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18113 \begin_layout Standard
18116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18117 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18121 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18124 \begin_layout Description
18126 The name of the game.
18129 \begin_layout Description
18131 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18135 \begin_layout Description
18137 The \SpecialChar TeX
18138 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18142 \begin_layout Description
18143 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18144 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18149 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18155 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18163 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18164 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18165 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18166 converges to the number
18167 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18170 : The actual version is
18171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 , the previous one was
18180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18191 \begin_layout Subsection
18193 \begin_inset Index idx
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18205 \begin_layout Standard
18206 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18207 space between two words.
18208 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18218 for units use the menu
18220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18221 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18231 arg "space-insert thin"
18237 \begin_layout Standard
18238 Here is an example to show the differences:
18241 \begin_layout Standard
18242 \begin_inset Tabular
18243 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18244 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 \begin_inset space ~
18257 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18269 space between number and unit
18276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18285 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18297 half space between number and unit
18310 \begin_layout Subsection
18312 \begin_inset Index idx
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18324 \begin_layout Standard
18325 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18327 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18328 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18329 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18330 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18331 These bits of text became known as
18342 \begin_layout Standard
18343 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18344 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18345 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18346 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18347 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18348 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18349 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18350 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18351 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18352 \begin_inset Newline newline
18360 \begin_inset Newline newline
18368 \begin_inset Newline newline
18371 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18372 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18373 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18375 \begin_inset space ~
18379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18381 key "latexcompanion"
18387 \begin_inset space ~
18391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18398 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18399 's page break mechanism.
18402 \begin_layout Chapter
18403 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18406 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18413 \begin_layout Standard
18414 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18417 \begin_inset space ~
18423 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18426 \begin_layout Section
18428 \begin_inset Index idx
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18447 \begin_layout Standard
18449 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18452 \begin_layout Description
18455 \begin_inset space ~
18458 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18459 \begin_inset Newline newline
18463 \begin_inset Note Note
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18467 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18475 \begin_layout Description
18476 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18477 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18478 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18481 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18482 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18484 \begin_inset space ~
18490 \begin_inset Newline newline
18494 \begin_inset Note Comment
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18507 \begin_layout Description
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18512 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18513 set in the document settings under
18515 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 \begin_inset space ~
18523 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 \begin_inset Newline newline
18531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18540 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18541 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18546 of a comment that appears in the output.
18552 \begin_inset Newline newline
18556 \begin_inset Newline newline
18559 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18562 \begin_layout Standard
18563 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18575 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18578 \begin_layout Section
18580 \begin_inset Index idx
18583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18592 name "sec:Footnotes"
18599 \begin_layout Standard
18601 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18607 or the toolbar button
18610 arg "footnote-insert"
18622 \begin_inset Graphics
18623 filename clipart/footnote.png
18632 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18633 's representation of your footnote.
18643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18662 label, the box will
18666 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18667 Clicking on the box label again will close
18680 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18681 and click on the footnote
18696 \begin_layout Standard
18697 Here is an example footnote:
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18706 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18714 \begin_layout Standard
18715 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18716 position where the footnote box is placed.
18717 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18718 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18719 according to the document class.
18721 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18722 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18728 ey are described in the
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_layout Section
18741 \begin_inset Index idx
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18753 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18760 \begin_layout Standard
18761 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18763 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18767 \begin_inset space ~
18772 or the toolbar button
18775 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18801 appearing within your text.
18802 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18803 's representation of your margin
18812 \begin_layout Standard
18813 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18817 \begin_inset Marginal
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 This is a marginal note.
18830 \begin_layout Standard
18831 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18832 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18833 pages, right on odd pages.
18836 \begin_layout Standard
18837 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18840 \begin_inset space ~
18848 \begin_inset space ~
18856 \begin_layout Section
18857 Graphics and Images
18858 \begin_inset Index idx
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 \begin_inset Index idx
18871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18880 name "sec:Graphics"
18887 \begin_layout Standard
18888 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18889 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18892 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18901 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18904 \begin_layout Standard
18905 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18910 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18911 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18913 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18914 \begin_inset space ~
18918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18920 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18927 \begin_layout Standard
18932 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18933 of the image in the output.
18934 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18938 \begin_inset space ~
18942 \begin_inset space ~
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset space ~
18959 \begin_inset space ~
18964 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18965 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18973 \begin_layout Standard
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18986 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18987 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18989 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18994 \begin_inset space ~
18999 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19000 with the image size is printed.
19003 \begin_layout Standard
19004 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19005 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19007 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19010 \begin_layout Standard
19012 \begin_inset Graphics
19013 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19021 \begin_layout Standard
19022 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19023 the image into a float, see section
19024 \begin_inset space ~
19028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19030 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19037 \begin_layout Subsection
19039 \begin_inset Index idx
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19051 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19058 \begin_layout Standard
19059 You can insert images in any known file format.
19060 But as we explained in section
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19067 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19071 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19073 therefore uses the program
19077 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19078 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19079 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19080 \begin_inset space ~
19084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19086 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19093 \begin_layout Standard
19094 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19097 \begin_layout Description
19099 \begin_inset space ~
19102 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19103 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19104 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19108 Graphics Interchange Format
19109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19112 (GIF, file extension
19113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19125 \begin_inset Index idx
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19160 Portable Network Graphics
19161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19164 (PNG, file extension
19165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19177 \begin_inset Index idx
19180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19212 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19216 (JPG, file extension
19217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19241 \begin_inset Index idx
19244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 \begin_layout Description
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19280 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19282 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19283 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19284 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19285 \begin_inset Newline newline
19288 Scalable image formats can be
19289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19292 Scalable Vector Graphics
19293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19296 (SVG, file extension
19297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19309 \begin_inset Index idx
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19344 Encapsulated PostScript
19345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19348 (EPS, file extension
19349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19361 \begin_inset Index idx
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19396 Portable Document Format
19397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19400 (PDF, file extension
19401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19413 \begin_inset Index idx
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19431 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19432 result will not be scalable.
19433 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19447 \begin_layout Standard
19448 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19455 \begin_layout Subsection
19456 Grouping of Image Settings
19457 \begin_inset Index idx
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 Images ! Settings grouping
19469 \begin_layout Standard
19470 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19472 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19473 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19475 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19476 need to manually change each of them.
19480 \begin_layout Standard
19481 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19484 \begin_inset space ~
19488 \begin_inset space ~
19500 \begin_inset space ~
19504 \begin_inset space ~
19510 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19511 and checking the name of the desired group.
19514 \begin_layout Section
19516 \begin_inset Index idx
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19535 \begin_layout Standard
19536 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19539 arg "tabular-insert"
19544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19548 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19549 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19550 from the rest of the table.
19551 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19552 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19554 Here is an example table:
19557 \begin_layout Standard
19559 \begin_inset Tabular
19560 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19561 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_layout Subsection
19769 \begin_layout Standard
19770 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19773 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19777 This brings up the table dialog.
19778 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19779 cursor is placed currently.
19780 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19781 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19782 done on all of your selection.
19785 \begin_layout Standard
19786 In addition to the table dialog, the
19789 \begin_inset space ~
19794 helps you in setting table properties.
19795 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19798 \begin_layout Standard
19802 \begin_inset space ~
19807 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19808 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19809 current cell respectively.
19810 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19812 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19813 of text, see section
19814 \begin_inset space ~
19818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19820 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19827 \begin_layout Standard
19828 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19829 using the check box
19838 This will merge the cells to
19842 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19843 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19844 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19845 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19846 in the last row without the upper border:
19849 \begin_layout Standard
19851 \begin_inset Tabular
19852 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19853 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19855 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 \begin_layout Standard
19989 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19990 -arguments for the table.
19991 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19992 explained in the chapter
19999 \begin_inset space ~
20005 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20006 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20007 but are visible in the output.
20010 \begin_layout Standard
20011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 Most DVI-viewers are
20023 able to display rotations.
20031 \begin_layout Standard
20036 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20041 adds lines for all cell borders.
20044 \begin_layout Subsection
20046 \begin_inset Index idx
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 Tables ! Multi-page
20056 \begin_inset Index idx
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 \begin_layout Standard
20069 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20072 \begin_inset space ~
20076 \begin_inset space ~
20084 \begin_inset space ~
20089 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20090 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20093 \begin_layout Description
20098 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20099 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20100 Except for the first page, if
20103 \begin_inset space ~
20111 \begin_layout Description
20115 \begin_inset space ~
20120 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20121 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20124 \begin_layout Description
20129 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20130 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20131 except for the last page, if
20134 \begin_inset space ~
20142 \begin_layout Description
20146 \begin_inset space ~
20151 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20152 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20155 \begin_layout Description
20156 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20157 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20163 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20166 \begin_inset space ~
20174 \begin_layout Standard
20175 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20176 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20177 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20183 In this context, first means first in this order:
20186 \begin_inset space ~
20198 \begin_inset space ~
20203 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20206 \begin_layout Standard
20208 \begin_inset Tabular
20209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20210 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20211 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20212 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20213 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20214 <row endfirsthead="true">
20215 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20226 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <row endfirsthead="true">
20246 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <row endhead="true">
20279 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20290 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <row endhead="true">
20310 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <row endfoot="true">
20343 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20363 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <row endlastfoot="true">
22325 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 \begin_layout Subsection
22364 \begin_inset Index idx
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22376 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22383 \begin_layout Standard
22384 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22385 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22386 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22387 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22391 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22394 \begin_layout Standard
22395 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22396 for the column in the table dialog.
22397 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22398 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22402 \begin_layout Standard
22404 \begin_inset Tabular
22405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22408 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 This is longer now.
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22611 This is longer now.
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22642 \begin_layout Standard
22643 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22644 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22650 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22656 Selection with the mouse or with
22660 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22661 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22662 the selection from outside the table.
22665 \begin_layout Section
22667 \begin_inset Index idx
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22686 \begin_layout Subsection
22690 \begin_layout Standard
22691 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22692 have a fixed location.
22694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22701 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22709 \begin_inset space ~
22714 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22715 too many notes on the current page.
22718 \begin_layout Standard
22719 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22720 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22721 and pages without text.
22722 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22723 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22724 Floats are therefore numbered.
22725 Referencing is described in section
22726 \begin_inset space ~
22730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22732 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22739 \begin_layout Standard
22740 To insert a float, use the menu
22742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22746 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22747 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22749 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22750 \begin_inset Index idx
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22760 paragraph within the float.
22761 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22762 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22763 left-clicking on the box label.
22764 A closed float box looks like this:
22765 \begin_inset Graphics
22766 filename clipart/float.png
22771 – a gray button with a red label.
22774 \begin_layout Standard
22775 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22777 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22780 \begin_layout Subsection
22782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22784 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22789 \begin_inset Index idx
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 Floats ! Figure floats
22801 \begin_layout Standard
22803 \begin_inset space ~
22807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22809 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22813 was created using the menu
22815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22816 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22822 arg "float-insert figure"
22826 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22835 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22839 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22840 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22842 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22844 \begin_inset space ~
22852 arg "layout-paragraph"
22858 \begin_layout Standard
22859 \begin_inset Float figure
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 \begin_inset Graphics
22867 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22882 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22886 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22899 \begin_layout Standard
22900 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22901 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22912 ) and refer to it using the menu
22914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22920 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22924 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22925 vague references like
22926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22933 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22934 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22944 For more about cross-references, see section
22945 \begin_inset space ~
22949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22951 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22958 \begin_layout Standard
22959 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22960 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22961 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22962 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22963 as described in section
22964 \begin_inset space ~
22968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22970 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22976 \begin_inset space ~
22980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22982 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22986 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22987 You can also set the images one below the other.
22989 \begin_inset space ~
22993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22995 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23002 reference "fig:Platypus"
23006 are the subfigures.
23009 \begin_layout Standard
23010 \begin_inset Float figure
23015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23020 \begin_inset Float figure
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23031 name "fig:Undefinable"
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 \begin_inset Graphics
23045 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23056 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23060 \begin_inset Float figure
23065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23071 name "fig:Platypus"
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 \begin_inset Graphics
23085 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23097 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23109 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23113 Two distorted images.
23126 \begin_layout Subsection
23128 \begin_inset Index idx
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 Floats ! Table floats
23140 \begin_layout Standard
23141 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23144 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23147 or the toolbar button
23150 arg "float-insert table"
23154 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23155 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23156 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23158 \begin_inset space ~
23162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23164 reference "tab:Table-float"
23171 \begin_layout Standard
23172 \begin_inset Float table
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23183 name "tab:Table-float"
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 \begin_inset Tabular
23198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23199 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23353 \end{array}\right]$
23361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23395 \begin_layout Subsection
23397 \begin_inset Index idx
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 \begin_layout Standard
23411 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23412 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23413 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23415 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23423 \begin_inset space ~
23431 \begin_layout Section
23433 \begin_inset Index idx
23436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23445 \begin_layout Standard
23447 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23449 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23450 \begin_inset space \space{}
23457 \begin_layout Standard
23458 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23459 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23465 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23466 and its alignment within the page.
23469 \begin_layout Standard
23471 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23481 height_special "totalheight"
23486 backgroundcolor "none"
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 This is a minipage.
23493 The text is set in an italic style.
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23500 another formatting.
23508 \begin_layout Standard
23509 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23512 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23516 as described in section
23517 \begin_inset space ~
23521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23523 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23528 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23534 \begin_layout Standard
23535 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23545 height_special "totalheight"
23550 backgroundcolor "none"
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23555 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23561 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23565 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23575 height_special "totalheight"
23580 backgroundcolor "none"
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23585 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23593 \begin_layout Standard
23594 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23600 \begin_layout Standard
23601 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23603 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23610 \begin_inset space ~
23618 \begin_layout Chapter
23619 Mathematical Formulas
23620 \begin_inset Index idx
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 \begin_inset Index idx
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23664 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23671 \begin_layout Standard
23672 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23677 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23680 \begin_layout Section
23682 \begin_inset Index idx
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 \begin_layout Standard
23695 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23708 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23710 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23711 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23712 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23720 \begin_layout Standard
23721 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23725 \begin_inset space ~
23730 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23735 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23739 This is a line with an inline formula
23740 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23746 \begin_layout Standard
23747 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23748 paragraph, like this one:
23749 \begin_inset Formula
23756 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23759 \begin_layout Standard
23761 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23763 For example, typing
23764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23777 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23778 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23782 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23785 \begin_inset space ~
23793 \begin_layout Subsection
23794 Navigating in Formulas
23795 \begin_inset Index idx
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 \begin_layout Standard
23808 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23809 achieved with the arrow keys.
23811 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23812 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23817 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23818 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23822 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23826 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23829 \end{array}\right]$
23837 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23842 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23843 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23846 \begin_layout Standard
23851 , printed in this document as
23852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23856 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23863 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23864 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23865 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23870 For example, if you want
23871 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23879 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23889 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23893 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23898 , since in the latter case only the
23901 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23906 will be under the square root sign:
23907 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23913 \begin_layout Standard
23914 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23916 \begin_inset Formula
23918 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23927 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23928 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23931 \begin_layout Subsection
23935 \begin_layout Standard
23936 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23937 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23941 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23942 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23943 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23944 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23945 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23949 \begin_layout Subsection
23950 Exponents and Subscripts
23951 \begin_inset Index idx
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 \begin_inset Index idx
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 \begin_layout Standard
23974 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23977 arg "math-superscript"
23983 arg "math-subscript"
23986 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23988 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23991 , type in a formula
23994 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24004 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24010 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24014 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24020 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24026 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24035 , you have to use an extra
24039 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24040 For example, if you want
24041 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24047 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24053 Subscripts are similar: To get
24054 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24060 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24068 \begin_layout Subsection
24070 \begin_inset Index idx
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_layout Standard
24083 Create a fraction either with the command
24089 or by using the icon
24092 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24098 \begin_inset space ~
24104 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24105 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24106 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24111 To move back up, press
24116 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24117 \begin_inset Formula
24119 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24122 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24130 \begin_layout Subsection
24132 \begin_inset Index idx
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 \begin_layout Standard
24145 Roots can be created using the
24148 \begin_inset space ~
24156 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24162 arg "math-insert \\root"
24184 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24190 always produces a square root.
24193 \begin_layout Subsection
24194 Operators with Limits
24195 \begin_inset Index idx
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 \begin_inset Index idx
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24217 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24224 \begin_layout Standard
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24230 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24233 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24234 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24235 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24236 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24237 The sum operator will automatically place its
24238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24245 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24247 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24251 \begin_inset Formula
24253 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24258 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24262 \begin_layout Standard
24263 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24265 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24266 behind the operator and using the menu
24268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24269 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24271 \begin_inset space ~
24275 \begin_inset space ~
24289 \begin_layout Standard
24290 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24299 \begin_inset Index idx
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 \begin_inset Formula
24311 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24316 which will place the
24317 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24329 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24330 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24336 \begin_layout Standard
24337 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24344 Have a look at section
24345 \begin_inset space ~
24349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24351 reference "subsec:Functions"
24355 for an explanation of function macros.
24358 \begin_layout Subsection
24360 \begin_inset Index idx
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 \begin_layout Standard
24373 Most math symbols can be found in the
24376 \begin_inset space ~
24381 under one of several categories; including
24398 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24402 \begin_layout Standard
24403 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24404 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24405 don't have to use the
24408 \begin_inset space ~
24413 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24415 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24418 \begin_layout Subsection
24420 \begin_inset Index idx
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 \begin_layout Standard
24433 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24439 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24445 \begin_inset space ~
24453 arg "math-insert \\space"
24457 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24458 For example, the sequence
24463 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24466 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24468 \begin_inset Graphics
24469 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24474 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24475 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24476 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24477 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24478 , because they are negative
24480 Here are two examples:
24483 \begin_layout Standard
24493 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24499 \begin_layout Standard
24509 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24515 \begin_layout Subsection
24517 \begin_inset Index idx
24520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24529 name "subsec:Functions"
24536 \begin_layout Standard
24540 \begin_inset space ~
24545 contains under the button
24548 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24551 a number of function macros, such as
24552 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24556 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24564 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24571 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24572 avoid confusions, because
24573 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24577 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24583 \begin_layout Standard
24584 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24586 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24590 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24597 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24598 are placed, as described in section
24599 \begin_inset space ~
24603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24605 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24612 \begin_layout Subsection
24614 \begin_inset Index idx
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 \begin_layout Standard
24627 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24629 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24630 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24631 commands, for example, to enter
24632 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24635 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24636 Our example is entered by typing
24641 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24648 \begin_inset space ~
24652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24654 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24658 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24661 \begin_layout Standard
24662 \begin_inset Float table
24667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24673 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24677 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 \begin_inset Tabular
24688 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24689 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24690 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24692 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24776 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25046 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25274 \begin_layout Standard
25275 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25278 \begin_inset space ~
25286 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25289 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25293 \begin_layout Section
25294 Brackets and Delimiters
25295 \begin_inset Index idx
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 \begin_inset Index idx
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25317 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25324 \begin_layout Standard
25325 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25327 For some purposes, using just the keys
25332 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25333 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25334 toolbar delimiter icon
25337 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25341 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25342 \begin_inset Formula
25344 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25352 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25353 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25357 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25360 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25366 \begin_inset Formula
25368 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25376 \begin_layout Standard
25377 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25378 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25382 \begin_layout Standard
25383 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25384 left side and right side.
25385 If you use the option
25388 \begin_inset space ~
25393 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25394 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25396 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25401 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25402 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25405 \begin_layout Standard
25406 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25407 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25408 is to go inside the brackets.
25409 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25414 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25415 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25416 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25420 arg "math-delim ( )"
25426 \begin_layout Section
25427 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25428 \begin_inset Index idx
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 \begin_inset Index idx
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 \begin_inset Index idx
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25460 \begin_layout Standard
25461 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25465 \begin_inset space ~
25473 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25477 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25478 Here is an example:
25479 \begin_inset Formula
25481 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25490 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25491 \begin_inset space ~
25495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25497 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25502 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25503 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25504 This alignment is set in the box
25509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25558 for every column as default.
25559 For example, the sequence
25560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25571 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25572 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25573 corresponds to the relevant column.
25574 The result will look like this:
25575 \begin_inset Formula
25578 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25579 column & has & has\,right\\
25580 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25589 \begin_layout Standard
25590 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25593 arg "newline-insert newline"
25596 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25597 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25599 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25602 or the math toolbar.
25605 \begin_layout Standard
25606 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25607 It can be created with the menu
25609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25610 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25612 \begin_inset space ~
25624 Here is an example:
25625 \begin_inset Formula
25639 \begin_layout Standard
25640 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25643 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25646 arg "newline-insert newline"
25650 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25655 arg "newline-insert newline"
25658 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25666 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25667 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25668 A new row is created by every further entry of
25671 arg "newline-insert newline"
25675 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25676 Here is an example:
25677 \begin_inset Formula
25679 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25680 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25685 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25686 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25687 \begin_inset Formula
25689 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25697 \begin_layout Standard
25698 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25705 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25706 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25709 reference "eq:asquared"
25714 The other types are described in section
25715 \begin_inset space ~
25719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25721 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25728 \begin_layout Section
25729 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25730 \begin_inset Index idx
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 Math ! Formula numbering
25740 \begin_inset Index idx
25743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 Math ! Referencing formulas
25750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25752 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25759 \begin_layout Standard
25760 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25763 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25765 \begin_inset space ~
25769 \begin_inset space ~
25777 arg "math-number-toggle"
25781 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25782 within parentheses.
25783 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25784 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25785 the document class.
25786 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25787 separated by a dot:
25788 \begin_inset Formula
25798 arg "math-number-toggle"
25801 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25802 You can only number displayed formulas.
25805 \begin_layout Standard
25806 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25809 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25815 \begin_inset space ~
25823 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25826 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25827 \begin_inset Formula
25830 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25836 To number all lines use the shortcut
25839 arg "math-number-toggle"
25845 \begin_layout Standard
25846 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25849 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25850 A label is inserted with the menu
25852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25861 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25862 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25863 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25875 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25876 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25877 We inserted in the following example the label
25878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25885 in the second line:
25886 \begin_inset Formula
25888 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25889 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25894 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25895 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25896 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25900 \begin_inset space ~
25908 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25912 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25913 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25914 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25915 as the formula number:
25918 \begin_layout Standard
25919 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25922 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25929 \begin_layout Standard
25930 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25931 's cross-reference box are described in section
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25938 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25943 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25951 \begin_layout Section
25952 User defined math macros
25953 \begin_inset Index idx
25956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25967 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25968 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25969 Math macros are explained in section
25972 \begin_inset space ~
25984 \begin_layout Section
25988 \begin_layout Subsection
25990 \begin_inset Index idx
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26002 \begin_layout Standard
26003 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26004 To set a font in a formula, use the
26007 \begin_inset space ~
26015 arg "math-insert \\font"
26018 , or enter its command, listed in table
26019 \begin_inset space ~
26023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26025 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 \begin_inset Float table
26038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26039 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26044 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26048 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 \begin_inset Tabular
26059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26060 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26121 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26181 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26269 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26296 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26330 \begin_layout Standard
26331 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26339 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26355 \begin_layout Standard
26356 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26357 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26362 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26363 space when you need a space in the box.
26364 Here is an example where
26365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26376 denotes the set of numbers:
26377 \begin_inset Formula
26379 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26387 \begin_layout Standard
26388 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26389 You can, for example, put a character in
26398 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26402 \begin_inset Newline newline
26405 So it is better not to use this feature.
26408 \begin_layout Standard
26409 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26410 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26414 \begin_inset Newline newline
26417 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26423 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26430 \begin_layout Standard
26437 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26440 \begin_layout Standard
26441 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26444 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26446 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_layout Subsection
26456 \begin_inset Index idx
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26468 \begin_layout Standard
26469 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26471 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26479 \begin_inset space ~
26487 \begin_inset space ~
26495 arg "math-insert \\font"
26499 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26500 in black instead of blue.
26501 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26502 Here is an example:
26503 \begin_inset Formula
26506 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26507 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26516 \begin_layout Subsection
26518 \begin_inset Index idx
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 \begin_layout Standard
26531 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26532 automatically chosen in most situations.
26550 For most characters,
26558 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26559 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26564 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26565 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26566 thinks are appropriate.
26567 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26570 arg "math-insert \\style"
26574 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26575 For example, you can set
26576 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26579 , which is normally in
26588 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26592 The four styles are used in the following example:
26595 \begin_layout Standard
26596 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26600 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26604 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26608 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26616 is set in a particular size with the menu
26618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26620 \begin_inset space ~
26625 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26626 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26627 will be adjusted to correspond.
26628 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26639 \begin_layout Standard
26643 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26649 \begin_layout Section
26650 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26652 \begin_inset Index idx
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26676 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26677 that are in common use.
26680 \begin_layout Subsection
26681 Enabling AMS-Support
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26686 the document by selecting the checkbox
26689 \begin_inset space ~
26693 \begin_inset space ~
26697 \begin_inset space ~
26704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26708 \begin_inset Index idx
26711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26712 Document ! Settings
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26726 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26727 -errors in formulas,
26728 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26731 \begin_layout Subsection
26733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26735 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26740 \begin_inset Index idx
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26752 \begin_layout Standard
26753 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26754 provides a selection of different formula types.
26756 allows you to choose between
26777 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26785 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26788 \begin_layout Chapter
26792 \begin_layout Section
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26806 name "sec:Cross-References"
26813 \begin_layout Standard
26814 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26815 's strengths is cross-references.
26816 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26818 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26819 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26820 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26823 \begin_layout Enumerate
26827 \begin_layout Enumerate
26828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26830 name "enu:Second-item"
26837 \begin_layout Enumerate
26841 \begin_layout Standard
26842 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26847 or by pressing the toolbar button
26854 A gray label box like this:
26855 \begin_inset Graphics
26856 filename clipart/label.png
26860 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26862 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26897 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26898 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26920 or the toolbar button
26923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26927 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26928 \begin_inset Graphics
26929 filename clipart/reference.png
26933 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26935 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26948 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26952 \begin_layout Standard
26953 As an alternative to
26955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26958 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26963 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26964 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26966 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26980 \begin_inset space ~
26984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26986 reference "enu:Second-item"
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26994 It is recommended to use a protected space
26998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26999 described in section
27000 \begin_inset space ~
27004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27006 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27015 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27016 line breaks between them.
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27020 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27023 \begin_layout Description
27024 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27027 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27034 \begin_layout Description
27035 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27036 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27048 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27055 \begin_layout Description
27056 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27057 \begin_inset space ~
27061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27062 LatexCommand pageref
27063 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27070 \begin_layout Description
27072 \begin_inset space ~
27076 \begin_inset space ~
27079 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27081 LatexCommand vpageref
27082 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27087 \begin_inset Newline newline
27090 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27091 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27092 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27093 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27094 it prints “on the next page”.
27095 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27098 \begin_layout Description
27100 \begin_inset space ~
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27108 \begin_inset space ~
27111 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27114 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27119 \begin_inset Newline newline
27122 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27128 ; otherwise it behaves like
27132 \begin_inset space ~
27136 \begin_inset space ~
27145 \begin_layout Description
27147 \begin_inset space ~
27150 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27151 \begin_inset Newline newline
27155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27163 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27173 \begin_inset Index idx
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27178 packages ! prettyref
27184 \begin_inset Index idx
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27189 packages ! refstyle
27200 \begin_inset Newline newline
27203 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27204 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27207 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27212 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27220 is the default and preferred because
27224 supports only English documents.
27225 The format is specified by using the command
27237 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27238 preamble of the document.
27239 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27257 \begin_inset Newline newline
27264 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27269 \begin_inset Newline newline
27280 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27281 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27283 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27284 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27289 , you might do so as follows:
27290 \begin_inset Newline newline
27297 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27302 \begin_inset Newline newline
27305 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27306 the package documentation
27307 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27309 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27315 \begin_inset Newline newline
27326 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27333 \begin_layout Description
27335 \begin_inset space ~
27338 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27340 LatexCommand nameref
27341 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27348 \begin_layout Description
27350 \begin_inset space ~
27353 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27354 label for the reference:
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 LatexCommand labelonly
27357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_inset Newline newline
27365 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27366 Code, if you want to issue a command
27367 that \SpecialChar LyX
27373 , then you may want to use the
27376 \begin_inset space ~
27381 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27391 This is the form needed for e.
27392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27396 \begin_inset space \space{}
27403 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27404 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27406 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27410 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27415 You can only use the style
27419 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27423 is always possible.
27426 \begin_layout Standard
27427 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27428 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27430 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27431 \begin_inset space ~
27435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27437 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27444 \begin_layout Standard
27445 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27449 \begin_inset space ~
27453 \begin_inset space ~
27458 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27459 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27462 \begin_inset space ~
27467 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27468 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27471 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27477 \begin_layout Standard
27478 You can change labels at any time.
27479 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27480 do not need to think about this.
27483 \begin_layout Standard
27484 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27486 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27490 \begin_layout Standard
27491 References are described in detail in the section
27492 \begin_inset space ~
27502 \begin_inset space ~
27510 \begin_layout Section
27511 Table of Contents and other Listings
27512 \begin_inset Index idx
27515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27522 \begin_inset Index idx
27525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27526 Navigating ! Outline
27532 \begin_inset Index idx
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27551 \begin_layout Subsection
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27555 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27563 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27568 \begin_inset space ~
27572 \begin_inset space ~
27578 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27580 If you click on it, the
27584 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27585 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27586 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27588 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27590 \begin_inset space ~
27595 that is described in section
27596 \begin_inset space ~
27600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27602 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27609 \begin_layout Standard
27610 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27611 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27613 \begin_inset space ~
27617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27619 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27623 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27625 \begin_inset space ~
27629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27631 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27635 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27637 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27640 \begin_layout Subsection
27641 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27644 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27654 You can insert them via the
27656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27660 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27663 \begin_layout Section
27664 URLs and Hyperlinks
27665 \begin_inset Index idx
27668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27675 \begin_inset Index idx
27678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 \begin_layout Subsection
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27699 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27708 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27710 \begin_inset Flex URL
27713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27730 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27734 \begin_layout Standard
27735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27752 \begin_layout Subsection
27754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27756 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27763 \begin_layout Standard
27764 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27769 or with the toolbar button
27776 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27785 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27786 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27789 name "LyX's homepage"
27790 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27795 , an Email address like this:
27796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27798 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27799 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27805 , or a link to a file.
27808 \begin_layout Standard
27809 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27822 to the link target.
27825 \begin_layout Standard
27826 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27827 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27828 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27829 the text style dialog.
27830 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27836 name "LyX's homepage"
27837 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27846 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27850 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27857 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27859 \begin_inset Newline newline
27867 \begin_inset Newline newline
27874 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27877 \begin_layout Section
27879 \begin_inset Index idx
27882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27891 name "sec:Appendices"
27898 \begin_layout Standard
27899 Appendices are created with the menu
27901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27903 \begin_inset space ~
27907 \begin_inset space ~
27913 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27914 as the appendix part of the book.
27915 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27918 \begin_layout Standard
27919 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27920 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27921 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27922 and the subsection number.
27923 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27935 reference "chap:Credits"
27940 \begin_inset space ~
27944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27946 reference "subsec:Export"
27953 \begin_layout Section
27955 \begin_inset Index idx
27958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27967 name "sec:Bibliography"
27974 \begin_layout Standard
27975 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27977 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
27978 \begin_inset space ~
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27984 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27991 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
27996 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
27997 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28008 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28009 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28010 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28014 using a bibliography database.
28017 \begin_layout Standard
28018 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28019 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28023 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28024 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28025 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28026 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28027 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28030 \begin_layout Subsection
28031 The Bibliography Environment
28032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28034 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28041 \begin_layout Standard
28046 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28048 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28057 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28059 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28060 of ASCII characters only.
28064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28069 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28075 \begin_inset Newline newline
28079 \begin_inset Flex URL
28082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28084 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28096 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28106 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28110 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28115 or the toolbar button
28118 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28122 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28123 containing the available citations.
28124 Select one or more keys from the list and
28134 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28135 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28139 \begin_layout Standard
28140 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28141 entry with surrounding brackets.
28146 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28147 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28163 Companion Second Edition
28166 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28168 key "latexcompanion"
28176 \begin_layout Standard
28177 The \SpecialChar LyX
28178 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28190 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28197 \begin_inset Index idx
28200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28208 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28220 Author A and Author B(Year)
28221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28228 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28230 Then, if you select
28233 \begin_inset space ~
28238 in the document settings
28239 \begin_inset Index idx
28242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28243 Document ! Settings
28250 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28252 \begin_inset space ~
28258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28260 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28267 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28276 \begin_inset space ~
28284 arg "layout-paragraph"
28288 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28291 \begin_layout Subsection
28292 Bibliography databases
28293 \begin_inset Index idx
28296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28297 Bibliography ! Databases
28303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28305 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28313 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28321 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28322 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28327 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28329 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28330 your working field in a database.
28331 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28332 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28333 list for that document.
28334 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28338 \begin_layout Standard
28339 The database is a text file with the file extension
28340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28351 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28352 The format is explained in
28353 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28360 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28364 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28370 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28371 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28372 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28374 \begin_inset Flex URL
28377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28379 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28387 \begin_layout Standard
28389 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28390 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28391 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28393 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28395 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28396 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28397 Those are addressed by
28402 \begin_inset Index idx
28405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28407 packages ! biblatex
28413 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28414 (although it has been significantly
28415 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28425 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28426 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28427 might conversely fail to correctly
28428 handle databases that use specific
28437 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28441 \begin_layout Standard
28442 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28447 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28453 \begin_inset Index idx
28456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28457 Document ! Settings
28469 \begin_inset space ~
28474 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28483 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28485 \begin_inset Index idx
28488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28489 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28498 \begin_layout Standard
28499 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28507 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28509 \begin_inset space ~
28515 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28516 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28524 Add bibliography to TOC
28526 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28531 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28532 in the document or just the cited references.
28535 \begin_layout Standard
28536 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28537 style file is a text file with the file extension
28538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28549 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28550 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28551 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28552 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28554 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28560 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28561 \begin_inset Newline newline
28565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28567 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28577 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28582 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28586 \begin_layout Standard
28587 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28592 \begin_inset Index idx
28595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28596 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28602 \begin_inset Index idx
28605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 packages ! biblatex
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28616 Accessing a database via
28620 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28628 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28636 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28637 you cannot select a
28642 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28651 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
28653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28664 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
28665 file (text file with the file extension
28666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28677 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28678 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
28680 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
28684 \begin_layout Standard
28689 styles are not set in the
28692 \begin_inset space ~
28697 dialog, but in the document settings.
28698 \begin_inset Index idx
28701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28702 Document ! Settings
28707 However, in the dialog in the
28711 field, which is only visible if you use
28715 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
28716 example how its heading will appear).
28717 These options are deescribed in detail in the
28722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28732 \begin_layout Standard
28733 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
28734 \begin_inset space ~
28738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28740 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28751 Bibliography Processors
28754 \begin_layout Standard
28755 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28757 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
28758 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
28759 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
28764 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
28766 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
28770 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
28776 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
28777 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28783 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
28784 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
28786 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
28787 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
28788 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28793 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
28794 do this on a general level in
28796 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28797 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28798 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28801 , or for individual documents
28802 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
28803 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28813 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28815 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
28820 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28821 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28822 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28828 The following variants are
28829 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
28831 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
28832 available by default
28837 \begin_layout Description
28839 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
28840 a specific, modern processor
28843 \begin_inset Index idx
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28854 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
28855 developed exclusively for
28859 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28867 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
28868 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
28869 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
28870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28874 \begin_inset space \space{}
28881 ), only with the package
28884 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
28887 and many specific features
28892 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
28898 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
28899 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28901 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
28907 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
28910 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
28919 \begin_layout Description
28920 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28921 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28922 with all bibliography packages,
28923 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
28925 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
28929 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
28930 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
28935 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
28938 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
28943 \begin_layout Description
28944 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
28945 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
28946 (but no Unicode support)
28948 , larger memory than
28952 , works with all bibliography packages
28953 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
28954 , although more complex
28959 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
28962 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
28967 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
28970 features are supported.
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28975 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
28977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28984 bibliography processor set in
28986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28998 bibliography processor in
29000 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29001 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29002 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29005 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29006 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29012 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29020 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29027 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29028 -based bibliography styles).
29029 This should suit most needs.
29034 \begin_layout Standard
29036 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29037 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29038 By default, this is
29046 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29047 You can adjust it in
29049 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29050 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29051 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29059 \begin_layout Standard
29060 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29061 can add below the selection.
29062 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29063 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29083 \begin_layout Standard
29085 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29087 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29090 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29091 When you select the option
29093 Sectioned bibliography
29097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29098 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29101 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29105 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29107 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29111 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29115 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29118 are explained in detail in section
29120 Customizing Bibliographies
29124 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29126 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29133 Additional Features
29138 \begin_layout Standard
29140 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29141 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29142 the two methods of creating them.
29143 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29144 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29145 We used the style file
29149 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29154 \begin_layout Subsection
29156 \begin_inset Index idx
29159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29160 Bibliography ! Citation format
29166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29168 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29175 \begin_layout Standard
29177 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29178 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29183 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29192 ) or author-year citations (as
29193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29202 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29206 \begin_layout Standard
29208 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29209 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29212 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29216 \begin_inset Index idx
29219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29221 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29222 Document ! Settings
29229 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29232 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29233 bibliography approach.
29236 \begin_layout Standard
29238 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29243 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29248 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29252 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29259 \begin_layout Standard
29261 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29262 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29270 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29278 Currently, the following options are available:
29281 \begin_layout Description
29283 \begin_inset space ~
29287 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29290 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29294 \begin_layout Description
29296 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29297 loads the Biblatex package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29300 Biblatex citation style
29304 Biblatex bibliography style
29307 Many different style variants are supported.
29312 package can be entered in the
29319 \begin_layout Description
29321 \begin_inset space ~
29325 \begin_inset space ~
29329 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29338 natbib compatibility mode
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29343 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29348 (see below) or want to emulate
29352 behavior very closely.
29357 , this option has some additional styles.
29358 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29363 styles are also supported by this variant.
29366 \begin_layout Description
29368 \begin_inset space ~
29372 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29377 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29380 \begin_layout Description
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29386 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29391 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29396 \begin_layout Standard
29398 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29407 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29409 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29414 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29416 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29417 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29434 , a suitable style is proposed).
29439 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29445 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29446 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29448 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29450 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29453 n the citation reference dialog
29454 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29455 you can set a special citation format
29459 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29460 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29461 a name prefix such as
29462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29481 e., use or don't use
29482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29491 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29492 For this feature you need to enable the option
29498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29502 \begin_inset Index idx
29505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29506 Document ! Settings
29516 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29517 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29518 style files as explained in
29519 the previous section.
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29526 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29527 In the citation dialog,
29528 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29530 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29533 ou can also set text to appear
29534 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29537 after a citation reference,
29538 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29539 in the citation reference window
29540 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29546 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29564 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29566 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29569 example where the text
29570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29574 \begin_inset space ~
29578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29581 appears after the reference:
29584 \begin_layout Quote
29586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29589 key "latexcompanion"
29595 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29601 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29602 All styles except for
29606 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
29607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29615 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29621 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
29622 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29623 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
29624 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
29630 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
29631 in a multi-citation (so-called
29632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29635 qualified citation lists
29636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29642 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
29644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29651 window will display three columns:
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29676 If you double-click on an item's
29677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29692 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29697 General text before
29698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29709 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29714 \begin_layout Section
29716 \begin_inset Index idx
29719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29740 \begin_inset space ~
29745 or the toolbar button
29752 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29753 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29754 by \SpecialChar LyX
29755 as the index entry.
29758 \begin_layout Standard
29759 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29762 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29764 \begin_inset space ~
29770 A light blue box labeled
29771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29782 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29783 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29787 \begin_layout Standard
29788 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29789 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29790 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29791 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29795 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29803 \begin_layout Subsection
29804 Grouping Index Entries
29805 \begin_inset Index idx
29808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29817 \begin_layout Standard
29818 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29820 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29821 lists under the entry
29822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29830 First we create the entry
29831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29839 \begin_inset space ~
29843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29845 reference "subsec:Lists"
29850 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29851 \begin_inset space ~
29855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29857 reference "sec:Itemize"
29861 , we insert the command
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29874 \begin_layout Standard
29880 \begin_layout Standard
29881 for the enumerated list in section
29882 \begin_inset space ~
29886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29888 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29895 \begin_layout Standard
29896 The exclamation mark
29897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29904 marks the grouping levels.
29905 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29906 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29907 If we don't have an index entry for
29908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29915 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29918 \begin_layout Subsection
29920 \begin_inset Index idx
29923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29924 Index ! Page ranges
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29935 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29936 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29937 an index entry in section
29938 \begin_inset space ~
29942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29944 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29954 Paragraph environments|(
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29958 and another entry at the end of section
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29965 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
29972 \begin_layout Standard
29975 Paragraph environments|)
29978 \begin_layout Standard
29980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30003 respectively start and end the index range.
30004 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30005 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30006 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30007 An example is the index entry
30008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30011 Document ! Settings
30012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30018 \begin_layout Subsection
30020 \begin_inset Index idx
30023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30024 Index ! Cross referencing
30032 \begin_layout Standard
30033 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30034 We referred for example in the index entry
30035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30043 \begin_inset space ~
30047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30049 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30053 ) to the index entry
30054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30061 in the same section using the entry
30064 \begin_layout Standard
30067 GIF|see{Image formats}
30070 \begin_layout Standard
30071 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30073 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30074 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30077 \begin_layout Subsection
30079 \begin_inset Index idx
30082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30083 Index ! Entry order
30091 \begin_layout Standard
30092 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30093 follow the rules for the index order.
30094 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30100 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30102 \begin_inset space ~
30106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30108 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30117 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30118 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30143 \begin_inset Index idx
30146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30147 Dummy entries ! maïs
30153 \begin_inset Index idx
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30157 Dummy entries ! maître
30163 \begin_inset Index idx
30166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30167 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30172 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30173 maïs, maison, maître.
30174 To achieve this, we use the command
30177 \begin_layout Standard
30180 previous entry@current entry
30183 \begin_layout Standard
30184 In our case we want to have
30185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30200 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30211 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30213 See the next subsection for an example.
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30217 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30223 \begin_layout Standard
30224 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30229 to generate the index (see section
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30236 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30245 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30246 -package aeguill in section
30247 \begin_inset space ~
30251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30253 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30257 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30258 -packages although all these index
30259 commands start with
30260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30273 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30278 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30281 \begin_layout Standard
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30305 \begin_layout Subsection
30307 \begin_inset Index idx
30310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 Index ! Entry layout
30319 \begin_layout Standard
30320 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30321 \begin_inset Index idx
30324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30327 This is an italic dummy entry
30332 You can also format the page number using the character
30333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30340 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30341 -command without a backslash.
30342 We can write for example
30345 \begin_layout Standard
30348 italic page number:|textit
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 to get the page number in italic.
30353 \begin_inset Index idx
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30357 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30362 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30363 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30381 \begin_inset space ~
30387 Have a look at section
30388 \begin_inset space ~
30392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30394 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30398 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30402 \begin_layout Standard
30403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30411 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30415 to generate the index, see section
30416 \begin_inset space ~
30420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30422 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30431 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30436 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30437 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30440 key "latexcompanion"
30453 \begin_layout Standard
30454 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30456 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30457 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30458 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30459 If so, put the following in the preamble
30462 \begin_layout Standard
30474 \begin_layout Standard
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30484 \begin_layout Standard
30485 in the index entry.
30486 \begin_inset Index idx
30489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30490 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30495 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30496 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30497 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30501 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30502 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30503 a bold font for all index entries.
30504 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30516 documentation for details,
30517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30519 key "makeindex,xindy"
30527 \begin_layout Subsection
30529 \begin_inset Index idx
30532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30541 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 If the index generation program
30553 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30554 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30558 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30559 distribution, is used.
30563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30568 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30569 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30570 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30571 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30572 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30582 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30584 dialog, see section
30585 \begin_inset space ~
30589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30591 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30596 The available options are listed and explained in
30597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30599 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30605 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30611 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30615 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30619 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30620 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30623 \begin_layout Subsection
30627 \begin_layout Standard
30628 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30629 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30637 next to the standard index.
30639 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30640 that add this feature.
30647 \begin_inset Index idx
30650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 packages ! splitidx
30657 package to generate multiple indexes.
30658 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30664 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30666 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30674 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30675 style, but it also includes
30676 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30677 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30685 \begin_layout Standard
30686 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30687 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30690 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30693 and select the option
30695 Use multiple Indexes
30702 already contains the standard index
30703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30711 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30712 also appear as a heading) to the
30716 input field and press the
30721 The new index now also appears in the list.
30722 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30723 label color to the new index.
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30737 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30738 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30739 are additional features:
30742 \begin_layout Itemize
30743 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30744 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30747 \begin_layout Itemize
30748 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30749 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30757 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30758 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30759 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30760 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30763 \begin_layout Section
30764 Nomenclature/Glossary
30765 \begin_inset Index idx
30768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30775 \begin_inset Index idx
30778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30809 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30816 \begin_layout Standard
30817 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30818 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30819 called nomenclature or glossary.
30822 \begin_layout Standard
30823 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30841 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30843 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30850 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30855 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30856 and then use the menu
30858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30864 \begin_inset space ~
30869 or the toolbar button
30872 arg "nomencl-insert"
30877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30888 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30891 \begin_layout Standard
30892 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30893 The first is the term or
30897 that you wish to define.
30902 of the term or symbol.
30905 \begin_layout Standard
30906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30914 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30915 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30923 \begin_layout Subsection
30924 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30925 \begin_inset Index idx
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 Nomenclature ! Layout
30937 \begin_layout Standard
30938 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30942 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30949 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30957 \begin_inset Newline newline
30965 \begin_inset Newline newline
30971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30978 character starts/ends the formula.
30979 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30980 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
30982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30992 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31002 \begin_layout Standard
31003 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31004 -syntax is given in section
31005 \begin_inset space ~
31009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31011 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31018 \begin_layout Standard
31022 \begin_inset space ~
31027 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31029 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31034 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31041 in this document is:
31042 \begin_inset Newline newline
31047 dummy entry for the character
31052 \begin_inset Newline newline
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31074 font use the command
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31109 \begin_inset space \space{}
31113 \begin_inset Newline newline
31129 \begin_inset Newline newline
31132 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31133 This command will make the font of all symbols
31140 \begin_inset space ~
31148 \begin_layout Standard
31149 If the characters |
31150 \begin_inset space \space{}
31154 \begin_inset space \space{}
31158 \begin_inset space \space{}
31162 \begin_inset space \space{}
31166 \begin_inset space \space{}
31169 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31170 a quote character in front of them.
31171 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31172 LatexCommand nomenclature
31173 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31174 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31182 \begin_layout Subsection
31183 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31184 \begin_inset Index idx
31187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31188 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31196 \begin_layout Standard
31197 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31198 -code of the symbol
31200 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31202 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31205 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31206 LatexCommand nomenclature
31208 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31216 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31220 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31221 LatexCommand nomenclature
31224 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31230 They will be sorted by
31231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31257 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31260 will be sorted before the
31264 since the character
31265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31272 is considered in sorting.
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31279 \begin_inset space ~
31284 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31285 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31287 For the example given, you can insert
31291 in this field for the
31292 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31299 will be located before
31300 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31307 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31312 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31322 \begin_layout Subsection
31323 Nomenclature Options
31324 \begin_inset Index idx
31327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31328 Nomenclature ! Options
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31341 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31342 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31345 \begin_layout Description
31346 refeq Appends the phrase
31347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31362 to every nomenclature entry, where
31368 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31371 \begin_layout Description
31372 refpage Appends the phrase
31373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31388 to every nomenclature entry, where
31394 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31397 \begin_layout Description
31398 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31401 \begin_layout Standard
31402 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31403 class options list in the
31405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31409 In this document the options
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31417 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31423 \begin_layout Standard
31424 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31425 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31430 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31433 \begin_layout Description
31443 \begin_layout Description
31446 nomrefpage Like the
31453 \begin_layout Description
31456 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31465 \begin_layout Description
31469 \begin_inset space ~
31475 \begin_inset space ~
31480 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31483 \begin_layout Standard
31485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31492 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31493 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31497 \begin_layout Standard
31505 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31508 \begin_inset Newline newline
31515 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31520 \begin_inset Newline newline
31524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31539 by their translation.
31542 \begin_layout Subsection
31543 Printing the Nomenclature
31544 \begin_inset Index idx
31547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31548 Nomenclature ! Printing
31556 \begin_layout Standard
31557 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31560 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31576 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31577 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31578 You can choose between these settings:
31581 \begin_layout Description
31582 Default a space of 1
31583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31589 \begin_layout Description
31591 \begin_inset space ~
31595 \begin_inset space ~
31598 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31601 \begin_layout Description
31602 Custom custom space
31605 \begin_layout Standard
31606 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31615 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31623 For example, in order to change the name to
31627 , add the following line to the preamble:
31630 \begin_layout Standard
31638 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31641 \begin_layout Subsection
31642 Nomenclature Program
31643 \begin_inset Index idx
31646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31647 Nomenclature ! Program
31653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31655 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31662 \begin_layout Standard
31668 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31669 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31671 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31676 by adding options, see section
31677 \begin_inset space ~
31681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31683 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31688 The available options are listed and explained in
31689 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31691 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31699 \begin_layout Section
31701 \begin_inset Index idx
31704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31711 \begin_inset Index idx
31714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31715 Document ! Branches
31721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31723 name "sec:Branches"
31730 \begin_layout Standard
31731 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31732 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31733 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31734 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31737 \begin_layout Standard
31738 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31739 allows you to put text into branches.
31740 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31741 To create a branch, either select the menu
31743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31744 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31747 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31756 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31757 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31758 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31759 and whether the name of the branch should
31760 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31761 (see below for an example).
31762 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31763 to the name of the other) and to add
31764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31776 \begin_inset space ~
31779 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31780 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31783 \begin_layout Standard
31784 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31785 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31787 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31790 where you can choose a branch.
31791 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31795 \begin_layout Standard
31796 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31797 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31800 \begin_layout Standard
31801 \begin_inset Branch Question
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31810 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31818 \begin_layout Standard
31819 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31828 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31836 \begin_layout Standard
31843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31844 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31847 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31848 Consider for example a file
31849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31856 which has the above branches.
31858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31865 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31889 branch were inactive,
31890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31905 branch was active, likewise
31906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31921 branch was active, and
31922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31925 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31929 if both branches were active.
31930 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31931 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31937 \begin_layout Standard
31938 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31944 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31945 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31975 branch is deactivated.
31981 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31987 \begin_layout Standard
31988 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
31989 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
31990 definitions for each branch.
31991 For example you can define for the question branch
31995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31996 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31997 -syntax, see section
31998 \begin_inset space ~
32002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32004 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32016 \begin_layout Standard
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32036 \begin_layout Standard
32037 and for the answer branch
32040 \begin_layout Standard
32050 \begin_layout Standard
32060 \begin_layout Standard
32061 \begin_inset Branch Question
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32098 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32134 \begin_layout Standard
32135 Now it is possible to use the
32139 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32146 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32149 commands to obtain conditional output.
32150 Here is an example formula where only the
32157 \begin_inset Formula
32159 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32167 \begin_layout Standard
32168 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32176 \begin_layout Standard
32177 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32183 \begin_inset space \space{}
32186 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32188 For this advanced usage, see the
32194 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32199 \begin_layout Section
32201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32203 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32208 \begin_inset Index idx
32211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32220 \begin_layout Standard
32223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32227 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32229 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32235 \begin_inset Index idx
32238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32240 packages ! hyperref
32245 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32246 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32247 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32248 part of the document.
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 The header information in the dialog tab
32257 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32258 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32259 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32260 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32264 \begin_inset space ~
32268 \begin_inset space ~
32273 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32274 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32275 and author entries.
32279 \begin_inset space ~
32283 \begin_inset space ~
32287 \begin_inset space ~
32292 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32296 You can specify in the dialog tab
32300 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32309 \begin_inset space ~
32313 \begin_inset space ~
32318 option allows long links to be split;
32321 \begin_inset space ~
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32329 \begin_inset space ~
32337 \begin_inset space ~
32342 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32345 \begin_inset space ~
32350 colors the different links.
32351 The default colors are:
32354 \begin_layout Labeling
32355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32360 for hyperlinks and URLs
32363 \begin_layout Labeling
32364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32372 \begin_layout Labeling
32373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32381 \begin_layout Standard
32382 but you can change these in the field
32387 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32390 \begin_layout Standard
32393 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32396 \begin_layout Standard
32401 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32402 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32403 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32406 \begin_layout Standard
32411 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32412 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32413 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32423 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32424 when opening the PDF.
32426 \begin_inset space ~
32429 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32430 \begin_inset space ~
32433 1 will only display the sections.
32436 \begin_layout Standard
32437 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32438 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32444 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32455 \begin_layout Section
32457 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32461 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32468 \begin_layout Subsection
32471 \begin_inset Index idx
32474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32484 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32491 \begin_layout Standard
32492 As \SpecialChar LyX
32493 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32494 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32495 commands and constructs,
32498 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32499 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32500 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32501 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32502 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32503 cannot support all packages and
32507 \begin_layout Standard
32508 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32509 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32510 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32514 Code box is created by the menu
32516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32518 \begin_inset space ~
32523 or by the toolbar button
32536 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32547 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32549 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32554 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32559 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32566 , you can write the command part
32572 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32573 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32577 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32578 Code box behind the word.
32579 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32580 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32584 \begin_layout Standard
32585 \begin_inset Graphics
32586 filename clipart/ERT.png
32594 \begin_layout Standard
32598 \begin_layout Standard
32599 This is a line with a
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32626 \begin_layout Standard
32627 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32635 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32636 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32637 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32638 know that the command is finished.
32646 \begin_layout Subsection
32647 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32649 \begin_inset Argument 1
32652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32653 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32660 \begin_inset Index idx
32663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32673 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32680 \begin_layout Standard
32681 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32682 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32683 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32684 uses in the background.
32685 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32686 is based on commands, you can
32687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32695 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32696 any time if you know the right commands.
32697 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32698 is the end of the day.
32699 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32700 all caption labels bold.
32701 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32703 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32707 \begin_layout Standard
32708 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32710 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32712 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32715 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32725 \begin_layout Standard
32726 As result you find that the package
32731 \begin_inset Index idx
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32742 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32747 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32751 \begin_inset space ~
32759 \begin_layout Standard
32764 usepackage[options]{package name}
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32769 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32770 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32771 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 In your case the package name is
32780 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32785 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32786 So you add the command
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32794 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32797 \begin_layout Standard
32798 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32803 For more commands provided by the
32807 package, have a look at its documentation,
32808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32824 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32826 For example if you use a
32830 class, you don't need the package
32834 , you can instead write
32837 \begin_layout Standard
32842 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32847 \begin_layout Standard
32848 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32849 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32850 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32857 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32861 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32862 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32864 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32865 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32866 Code box as described in the previous
32870 \begin_layout Standard
32871 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32872 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32875 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32877 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32886 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 \begin_inset Note Note
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32910 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32918 \begin_layout Left Header
32919 \begin_inset Argument 1
32922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32942 \begin_inset Note Note
32945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32946 defines the header line as described below
32954 \begin_layout Center Header
32955 \begin_inset Argument 1
32958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32967 \begin_layout Right Header
32968 \begin_inset Argument 1
32971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32992 \begin_layout Left Footer
32993 \begin_inset Argument 1
32996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 \begin_layout Center Footer
33018 \begin_inset Argument 1
33021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33033 \begin_inset Newline newline
33037 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33043 \begin_layout Right Footer
33044 \begin_inset Argument 1
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33069 \begin_layout Section
33070 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33073 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33078 \begin_inset Index idx
33081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33082 Document ! Header/Footer line
33088 \begin_inset Index idx
33091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33100 \begin_layout Standard
33101 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33105 \begin_inset space ~
33116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33122 \begin_inset space ~
33128 As a second step add in the menu
33130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33131 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33140 Custom Header/Footerlines
33143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33147 This module offers the following 6
33148 \begin_inset space ~
33154 \begin_layout Description
33156 \begin_inset space ~
33160 \begin_inset space ~
33164 \begin_inset space ~
33168 \begin_inset space ~
33172 \begin_inset space ~
33178 \begin_layout Description
33180 \begin_inset space ~
33184 \begin_inset space ~
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33192 \begin_inset space ~
33196 \begin_inset space ~
33202 \begin_layout Standard
33203 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33204 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33207 \begin_layout Standard
33208 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33209 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33211 \begin_inset space ~
33215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33217 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33221 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33224 \begin_layout Standard
33225 \begin_inset Float figure
33231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33234 \begin_inset Tabular
33235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33236 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33238 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33239 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33259 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33288 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33299 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33303 The normal text on the page goes here.
33304 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33306 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33307 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33312 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33321 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33332 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33350 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33402 name "fig:Page-layout"
33406 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33419 \begin_layout Standard
33420 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33432 \begin_inset space ~
33437 is set to “Default”.
33438 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33447 \begin_layout Subsection
33451 \begin_layout Standard
33452 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33453 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33454 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33455 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33457 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33459 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33464 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33468 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33470 \begin_inset space ~
33478 \begin_layout Description
33481 thepage prints the current page number
33484 \begin_layout Description
33487 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33490 \begin_layout Description
33493 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33496 \begin_layout Description
33499 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33500 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33507 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33510 because it usually goes in a left header.
33513 \begin_layout Description
33516 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33517 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33519 It is normally used in the right header.
33522 \begin_layout Subsection
33523 Default header/footer
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33527 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33528 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33529 footer has the page number.
33530 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33531 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33532 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33535 \begin_inset space ~
33543 \begin_layout Subsection
33547 \begin_layout Standard
33548 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33549 Some pages are different.
33550 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33551 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33552 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33553 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33554 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33558 Header and footer decoration line
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 By default, you get a 0.4
33563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33566 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33567 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33579 in the following way:
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33589 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33592 \begin_layout Standard
33593 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33606 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33613 \begin_layout Standard
33614 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33616 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33617 \begin_inset space ~
33621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33632 Several header/footer lines
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33637 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33638 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33640 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33656 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33658 \begin_inset space ~
33666 \begin_layout Standard
33673 headheight}{height}
33676 \begin_layout Standard
33681 is a size in standard units (e.
33682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33686 \begin_inset space \space{}
33694 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33695 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33696 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33697 logfile with the menu
33699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33701 \begin_inset space ~
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33714 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33719 \begin_inset Index idx
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33724 packages ! fancyhdr
33730 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33731 for your header/footer.
33734 \begin_layout Subsection
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33739 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33740 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33741 This example consists of the following definition:
33744 \begin_layout Description
33746 \begin_inset space ~
33755 , empty optional argument
33758 \begin_layout Description
33760 \begin_inset space ~
33763 Header empty, empty optional argument
33766 \begin_layout Description
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33777 in the optional argument
33780 \begin_layout Description
33782 \begin_inset space ~
33791 in the optional argument
33794 \begin_layout Description
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33813 \begin_inset Newline newline
33817 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33824 in the optional argument
33827 \begin_layout Description
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33838 , empty optional argument
33841 \begin_layout Description
33844 headrulewidth set to 2
33845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33853 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33869 \begin_layout Standard
33870 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33884 pagestyle{headings}
33890 \begin_inset Note Note
33893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33894 switches back to page style with the default headings
33902 \begin_layout Section
33903 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33906 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33911 \begin_inset Index idx
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 \begin_inset Index idx
33924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33933 \begin_layout Standard
33935 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33936 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33937 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33940 \begin_layout Subsection
33944 \begin_layout Standard
33945 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33951 \begin_inset Index idx
33954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33956 packages ! preview-latex
33961 (on some systems named simply
33966 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33968 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33975 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33977 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
33985 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
33986 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33987 -package are automatically
33988 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
33992 \begin_layout Subsection
33996 \begin_layout Standard
33997 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33998 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34000 activate the option
34003 \begin_inset space ~
34010 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34016 \begin_inset space ~
34020 \begin_inset space ~
34023 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34043 \begin_inset space ~
34048 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34051 \begin_layout Standard
34052 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34057 \begin_inset space ~
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34074 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34075 and when you finish
34079 \begin_layout Standard
34080 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34088 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34089 generated by activating the option
34092 \begin_inset space ~
34098 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34106 \begin_layout Subsection
34107 Selected document parts
34110 \begin_layout Standard
34111 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34112 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34113 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34114 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34116 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34122 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34123 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34124 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34127 \begin_layout Standard
34128 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34135 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34147 is explained in section
34149 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34154 \begin_inset space ~
34164 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34165 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34166 the final rotated boxes,
34167 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34168 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34170 Here is the result:
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 \begin_inset Preview
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34185 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34191 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34201 height_special "totalheight"
34206 backgroundcolor "none"
34209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34234 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34240 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34263 Previewing works also for colors.
34264 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34283 is explained in section
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34304 \begin_inset Preview
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34329 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34334 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 If \SpecialChar LyX
34362 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34363 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34364 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34365 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34366 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34367 the \SpecialChar TeX
34369 If \SpecialChar LyX
34370 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34371 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34373 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34374 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34375 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34378 \begin_layout Subsection
34383 \begin_layout Standard
34384 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34385 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34388 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34395 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34397 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34399 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34400 's main window, then only this selection
34401 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34402 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34403 the source view window.
34408 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34409 ; but note that if you have
34410 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34412 not just the one which is open at the time.
34415 \begin_layout Section
34416 Advanced Find and Replace
34417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34419 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34424 \begin_inset Index idx
34427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34434 \begin_inset Index idx
34437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34446 \begin_layout Subsection
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34452 allows for searching of complex,
34453 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34455 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34456 The key-features are:
34459 \begin_layout Itemize
34460 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34461 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34462 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34466 \begin_layout Itemize
34467 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34468 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34469 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34470 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34473 \begin_layout Itemize
34474 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34475 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34476 outside of mathematics environments
34479 \begin_layout Itemize
34480 Search may be widened to a specific
34485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34489 \begin_inset space ~
34492 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34493 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34500 \begin_layout Itemize
34501 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34502 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34510 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34513 \begin_layout Subsection
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34520 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34533 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34536 ) or the toolbar button
34539 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34545 Advanced Find and Replace
34550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34554 \begin_layout Standard
34560 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34564 \begin_inset space ~
34569 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34572 arg "paragraph-break"
34576 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34577 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34581 arg "paragraph-break"
34584 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34588 searches backwards.
34591 \begin_layout Standard
34595 \begin_inset space ~
34600 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34609 \begin_inset space ~
34614 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34618 Searching for mathematics
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 Mathematical formulas, such as
34623 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34626 or something more complex like
34627 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34630 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34635 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34636 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34637 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34638 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34648 \begin_layout Standard
34649 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34650 This is done by switching to the
34654 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34659 This way, entering in the
34666 \begin_layout Itemize
34667 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34668 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34671 \begin_layout Itemize
34672 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34673 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34676 \begin_layout Itemize
34677 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34678 of it only within section headings.
34679 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34680 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34684 \begin_layout Itemize
34685 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34686 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34693 \begin_layout Standard
34694 The entries made in the
34698 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34701 \begin_inset space ~
34707 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34711 button or alternatively press
34714 arg "paragraph-break"
34721 while the cursor is in the
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34732 \begin_layout Standard
34733 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34735 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34739 \begin_layout Itemize
34740 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34741 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34749 with its typewriter version
34750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34764 \begin_layout Itemize
34765 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34771 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34783 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34790 (you may want to enable the
34793 \begin_inset space ~
34801 \begin_inset space ~
34806 options and disable the
34814 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34822 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34823 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34827 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34830 , or occurrences of
34831 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34835 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34841 \begin_layout Subsection
34845 \begin_layout Standard
34846 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34853 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34855 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34865 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34871 This is done with the context menu
34873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34874 Insert Regular Expression
34876 while the cursor is in the
34881 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34882 expression matching rules
34886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34887 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34894 \begin_inset space ~
34897 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34898 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34904 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34905 same text in the document.
34906 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34907 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34910 \begin_layout Enumerate
34911 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34916 editor the fraction
34917 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34921 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34924 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34925 fractions with the given denominator.
34928 \begin_layout Enumerate
34929 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34941 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34946 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34947 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34948 Also, by inserting a
34949 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34952 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34953 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34956 \begin_layout Standard
34957 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
34958 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
34959 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34962 , and referring back to them through
34963 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34967 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
34971 For example, try searching with the regexp
34972 \begin_inset Newline newline
34975 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
34978 \begin_inset Newline newline
34981 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
34984 \begin_layout Standard
34985 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
34988 \begin_layout Standard
34989 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34997 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
34998 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
34999 sub-expressions is absolute.
35001 \begin_inset space ~
35005 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35008 always refers to the first occurrence of
35009 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35012 in all entered regexps.
35020 \begin_layout Section
35022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35024 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35029 \begin_inset Index idx
35032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35041 \begin_layout Standard
35043 has a built-in spell checker.
35046 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35053 key or the toolbar button
35056 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35059 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35060 beginning of the currently selected text.
35061 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35062 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35063 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35064 scrolled so that it is visible.
35065 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35066 n, if any could be found.
35067 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35071 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35072 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35075 \begin_layout Standard
35076 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35083 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35084 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35086 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35087 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35090 \begin_inset space ~
35098 arg "dialog-show character"
35101 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35103 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35106 \begin_layout Standard
35107 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35108 can be downloaded from here:
35109 \begin_inset Newline newline
35113 \begin_inset Flex URL
35116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35118 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35124 \begin_inset Newline newline
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35131 files for each language.
35132 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35133 \begin_inset space ~
35136 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35137 's installation subfolder
35145 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35147 \begin_inset Newline newline
35150 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35151 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35152 but in most cases these are
35168 is the language code.
35171 \begin_layout Subsection
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35178 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35179 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35181 \begin_inset space ~
35184 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35187 you can set the following things:
35190 \begin_layout Description
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35195 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35196 should use for spell checking.
35197 Depending on your platform,
35211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35212 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35213 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35231 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35234 \begin_layout Description
35236 \begin_inset space ~
35239 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35240 will always use the given language
35241 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35244 \begin_layout Description
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35249 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35255 \begin_inset space \space{}
35259 This should normally not be needed.
35262 \begin_layout Description
35264 \begin_inset space ~
35268 \begin_inset space ~
35271 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35283 \begin_layout Description
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35288 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35289 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35290 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35291 appear in a context menu.
35292 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35296 \begin_layout Description
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35309 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35313 \begin_layout Section
35315 \begin_inset Index idx
35318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35327 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35336 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35337 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35349 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35359 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35361 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35362 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35363 which are available for many languages.
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35368 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35372 \begin_layout Subsection
35373 Setting up the thesaurus
35376 \begin_layout Standard
35385 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35389 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35394 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35400 \begin_inset space ~
35408 For instance, the US English files are named:
35411 \begin_layout Itemize
35415 \begin_layout Itemize
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35428 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35429 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35433 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35434 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35436 \begin_inset space ~
35441 ) to the path where they are installed.
35445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35446 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35447 ies, typical locations are
35453 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35457 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35461 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35464 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35470 LibreOffice-<Version>
35477 On the Mac, the default location is
35479 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35480 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35481 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35482 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35483 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35484 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35492 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35493 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35494 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35499 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35500 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35504 \begin_layout Itemize
35505 \begin_inset Flex URL
35508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35510 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35520 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35522 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35523 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35524 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35531 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35533 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35534 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35538 \begin_layout Standard
35539 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35541 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35544 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35550 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35553 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35554 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35562 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35563 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35564 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35571 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35574 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 Using the thesaurus
35578 \begin_layout Standard
35579 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35581 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35584 or the toolbar button
35587 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35590 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35592 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35594 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35595 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35596 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35605 ), related terms (such as
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35617 ), compounds (such as
35620 \begin_inset space ~
35629 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35638 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35642 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35643 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35647 \begin_layout Standard
35648 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35649 the dictionary, such as the above
35653 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35658 \begin_inset space \space{}
35661 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35662 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35663 For example, looking up the word form
35667 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35672 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35677 \begin_inset space \space{}
35688 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35689 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35690 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35693 \begin_layout Section
35695 \begin_inset Index idx
35698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35705 \begin_inset Index idx
35708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35709 Document ! Change Tracking
35715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35717 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35724 \begin_layout Standard
35725 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35726 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35727 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35728 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35732 \begin_inset space ~
35735 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35737 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_layout Standard
35746 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35760 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35761 You can change the color in
35763 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35764 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35775 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35781 \begin_inset Index idx
35784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35785 Color ! Change tracking
35790 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35791 's status bar when the
35792 cursor is in changed text.
35793 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35796 arg "changes-merge"
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35803 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35805 \begin_inset Index idx
35808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35817 \begin_layout Standard
35818 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35824 \begin_layout Standard
35825 \begin_inset Graphics
35826 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35834 \begin_layout Standard
35835 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35841 \begin_layout Standard
35842 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35845 \begin_layout Standard
35846 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35852 \begin_layout Standard
35853 \begin_inset Tabular
35854 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35855 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35856 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35857 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35867 arg "changes-track"
35875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35886 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35906 arg "changes-output"
35914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35925 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35927 \begin_inset space ~
35931 \begin_inset space ~
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35965 Jumps to the next change
35971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35980 arg "change-accept"
35988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35996 \begin_inset space ~
35999 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36010 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36019 arg "change-reject"
36027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36035 \begin_inset space ~
36038 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36058 arg "changes-merge"
36066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36072 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36074 \begin_inset space ~
36077 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36079 \begin_inset space ~
36088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36097 arg "all-changes-accept"
36105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36116 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36140 arg "all-changes-reject"
36148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36159 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36198 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36232 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36250 \begin_layout Standard
36251 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36257 \begin_layout Standard
36258 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36278 \begin_layout Standard
36279 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36280 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36281 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36282 the next change after the current cursor position.
36283 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36284 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36285 step to the next change.
36286 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36289 \begin_layout Standard
36290 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36291 to describe a change.
36294 \begin_layout Standard
36295 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36301 \begin_inset Index idx
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36312 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36314 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36321 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36325 \begin_layout Section
36326 Comparison of Documents
36327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36329 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36334 \begin_inset Index idx
36337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 Comparison of documents
36346 \begin_layout Standard
36347 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36350 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36354 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36355 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36357 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36359 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36388 \begin_inset space ~
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36405 enables the change tracking option
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36421 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36424 \begin_layout Section
36425 International Support
36426 \begin_inset Index idx
36429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 International support
36438 \begin_layout Standard
36439 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36440 with any language you want.
36441 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36442 up \SpecialChar LyX
36444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36446 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36454 \begin_layout Standard
36455 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36456 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36463 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36470 \begin_layout Subsection
36472 \begin_inset Index idx
36475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36482 \begin_inset Index idx
36485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36486 Document ! Settings
36492 \begin_inset Index idx
36495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36496 Document ! Language
36504 \begin_layout Standard
36507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36508 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36511 dialog lets you set
36513 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36518 \begin_layout Standard
36523 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36533 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36534 For details about the different encoding options see section
36535 \begin_inset space ~
36539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36541 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36548 \begin_layout Subsection
36549 Keyboard mapping configuration
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36552 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36559 \begin_layout Standard
36560 If you have for example a U.
36561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36564 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36565 can use an alternate keymap.
36566 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36571 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36572 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36573 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36576 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36577 \begin_inset space ~
36581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36583 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36588 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36589 which one you want to use.
36592 \begin_layout Standard
36593 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36594 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36595 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36599 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36600 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36601 one to support the characters you want.
36602 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36609 \begin_layout Chapter
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36614 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36622 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36623 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36624 topic inside the user's guide.
36627 \begin_layout Section
36629 \begin_inset Index idx
36632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36641 \begin_layout Standard
36646 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36649 \begin_layout Subsection
36653 \begin_layout Standard
36654 Creates a new document.
36657 \begin_layout Subsection
36661 \begin_layout Standard
36662 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36663 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36664 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36667 \begin_layout Subsection
36671 \begin_layout Standard
36675 \begin_layout Subsection
36679 \begin_layout Standard
36680 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36681 Click there on a file to open it.
36684 \begin_layout Subsection
36688 \begin_layout Standard
36689 Closes the current document.
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 Closes all opened documents.
36700 \begin_layout Subsection
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36705 Saves the actual document.
36708 \begin_layout Subsection
36712 \begin_layout Standard
36713 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36716 \begin_layout Subsection
36720 \begin_layout Standard
36721 Saves all opened documents.
36724 \begin_layout Subsection
36728 \begin_layout Standard
36729 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36732 \begin_layout Subsection
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36738 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36739 It is described in the section
36741 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36746 Additional Features
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36757 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36759 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36760 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36764 \begin_layout Standard
36765 When using the menu entry
36768 \begin_inset space ~
36773 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36790 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36791 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36798 name "subsec:Export"
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 You can export your document to various file formats.
36807 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36809 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36810 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36811 during its configuration.
36814 \begin_layout Standard
36815 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36823 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36830 \begin_layout Description
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36839 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36841 \begin_inset space ~
36844 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36845 \begin_inset Newline newline
36848 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36849 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36853 \begin_layout Description
36854 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36860 \begin_layout Description
36862 \begin_inset space ~
36865 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36871 \begin_layout Description
36872 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36873 's native DVI-format.
36874 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36875 files paths or file names in your document.
36877 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36884 \begin_layout Description
36885 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36886 in files paths or file names
36889 \begin_layout Description
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36898 ) DVI-format using the program
36900 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36903 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36915 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36923 \begin_layout Description
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36928 (cropped) the same as
36932 but with cropped page margins.
36935 \begin_layout Description
36937 \begin_inset space ~
36940 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36944 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36949 \begin_layout Description
36953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36961 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
36969 \begin_layout Description
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36978 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
36982 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
36990 \begin_layout Description
36994 \begin_inset space ~
37003 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37004 source that is compilable with the program
37006 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37010 \begin_layout Description
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37019 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37020 source, additionally all images used in the document
37021 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37025 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37028 \begin_layout Description
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37037 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37038 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37039 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37047 \begin_layout Description
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37060 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37061 source that is compilable with the program
37067 \begin_layout Description
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37080 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37081 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37087 \begin_layout Description
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37092 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37093 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37099 \begin_inset space \space{}
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37123 represent the version number)
37126 \begin_layout Description
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37135 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37136 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37137 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37141 \begin_layout Description
37142 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37143 's internal XHTML engine
37146 \begin_layout Description
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37163 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37168 For the conversion the program
37177 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37180 \begin_layout Description
37181 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37186 \begin_layout Description
37188 \begin_inset space ~
37191 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37193 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37196 For the conversion the program
37205 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37208 \begin_layout Description
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37213 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37214 For the conversion the program
37223 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37226 \begin_layout Description
37228 \begin_inset space ~
37231 (cropped) the same as
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37239 but with cropped page margins
37242 \begin_layout Description
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37251 PDF-format using the program
37255 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37258 \begin_layout Description
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37279 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37284 \begin_inset space \space{}
37287 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37291 \begin_layout Description
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37300 PDF-format using the program
37302 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37305 , produces PDF-files directly
37308 \begin_layout Description
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37317 PDF-format using the program
37321 , produces PDF-files directly
37324 \begin_layout Description
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37333 PDF-format using the program
37337 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37340 \begin_layout Description
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37349 PDF-format using the program
37354 , produces PDF-files directly
37357 \begin_layout Description
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37369 \begin_layout Description
37373 \begin_inset space ~
37377 \begin_inset space ~
37382 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37383 and then exported as text using the program
37388 \begin_layout Description
37393 PostScript format using the program
37401 options see section
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37408 reference "subsec:General-output"
37415 \begin_layout Description
37416 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37417 source and also code in the statistical programming
37431 it is possible to use
37435 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 If one of the menu entries
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37456 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37458 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37466 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37471 \begin_inset Index idx
37474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37475 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37484 \begin_layout Subsection
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37490 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37499 reference "sec:Paths"
37504 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37513 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37514 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37515 's preferences as described in section
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37522 reference "subsec:Converters"
37529 \begin_layout Subsection
37530 New and Close Window
37533 \begin_layout Standard
37534 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37538 \begin_layout Subsection
37542 \begin_layout Standard
37543 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37546 \begin_layout Section
37548 \begin_inset Index idx
37551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37560 \begin_layout Subsection
37564 \begin_layout Standard
37565 Described in section
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37572 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37579 \begin_layout Subsection
37580 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37583 \begin_layout Standard
37584 Described in section
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37591 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37598 \begin_layout Subsection
37602 \begin_layout Standard
37603 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37604 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37607 \begin_layout Subsection
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37612 Selects the whole document.
37615 \begin_layout Subsection
37616 Find & Replace (Quick)
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37620 Described in section
37621 \begin_inset space ~
37625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37627 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37634 \begin_layout Subsection
37635 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37638 \begin_layout Standard
37639 Described in section
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37646 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37653 \begin_layout Subsection
37654 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37657 \begin_layout Standard
37658 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37662 \begin_layout Subsection
37666 \begin_layout Standard
37667 Described in section
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37674 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37681 \begin_layout Subsection
37683 \begin_inset Index idx
37686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37687 Paragraph ! Settings
37695 \begin_layout Standard
37696 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37697 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37701 \begin_layout Standard
37702 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37703 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37720 \begin_layout Subsection
37721 Table and Rows & Columns
37724 \begin_layout Standard
37725 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37726 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37727 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37736 It will dissolve this inset.
37737 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37741 \begin_layout Subsection
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37747 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37750 \begin_layout Subsection
37751 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37755 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37757 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37758 \begin_inset space ~
37762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37764 reference "sec:Nesting"
37769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37771 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37778 \begin_layout Subsection
37781 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37784 \begin_layout Standard
37785 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37786 nts of the same type.
37788 \begin_inset space ~
37792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37794 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37798 for an explanation.
37801 \begin_layout Section
37803 \begin_inset Index idx
37806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37815 \begin_layout Standard
37816 At the bottom of the
37820 menu the opened documents are listed.
37823 \begin_layout Subsection
37824 Open/Close all Insets
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37831 \begin_layout Subsection
37832 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37835 \begin_layout Standard
37836 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37839 \begin_layout Standard
37840 Math macros are described in the
37847 \begin_layout Subsection
37851 \begin_layout Standard
37852 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37859 reference "sec:Navigating"
37864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37866 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37886 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37893 \begin_layout Subsection
37897 \begin_layout Standard
37898 Opens a window showing console messages.
37899 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37904 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37905 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37906 is processing the document.
37909 \begin_layout Subsection
37911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37913 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37918 \begin_inset Index idx
37921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37930 \begin_layout Standard
37931 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37932 All toolbars and the
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37940 can be turned on and off.
37945 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37974 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
37978 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
37985 \begin_layout Standard
37990 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
37994 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
37995 or when a certain feature is enabled.
37996 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
37997 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
37998 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38003 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38010 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38017 \begin_layout Subsection
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38025 \begin_inset space ~
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38041 \begin_inset space ~
38045 \begin_inset space ~
38050 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38051 's main window vertically while
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38058 \begin_inset space ~
38062 \begin_inset space ~
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38079 will split it horizontally.
38080 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38081 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38082 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38083 three or more documents at the same time.
38084 To close a split view, use the menu
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset space ~
38099 \begin_layout Subsection
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 Closes a split view.
38107 \begin_layout Subsection
38111 \begin_layout Standard
38112 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38113 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38114 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38115 's main window fullscreen.
38116 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38117 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38120 \begin_layout Section
38122 \begin_inset Index idx
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38134 \begin_layout Subsection
38138 \begin_layout Standard
38139 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38140 \begin_inset space ~
38144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38146 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38157 \begin_layout Subsection
38159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38161 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38168 \begin_layout Standard
38169 Here you can insert the following characters:
38172 \begin_layout Description
38177 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38180 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38181 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38182 -packages you have installed.
38183 You can get a complete display by checking
38186 \begin_inset space ~
38192 \begin_inset Newline newline
38196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38204 Not all characters will be visible in the
38208 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38209 dialog (see section
38210 \begin_inset space ~
38214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38216 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38220 ) can display every character.
38228 \begin_layout Description
38229 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38233 \begin_layout Description
38235 \begin_inset space ~
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38242 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38243 \begin_inset space ~
38247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38249 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38256 \begin_layout Description
38258 \begin_inset space ~
38261 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38265 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38271 \begin_layout Description
38273 \begin_inset space ~
38276 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38280 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38286 \begin_layout Description
38288 \begin_inset space ~
38291 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38295 \begin_layout Description
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38300 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38304 \begin_layout Description
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38309 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38315 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38321 \begin_layout Description
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38326 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38330 \begin_layout Description
38332 \begin_inset space ~
38336 \begin_inset Index idx
38339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38346 \begin_inset Index idx
38349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38355 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38356 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38358 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38364 \begin_inset Index idx
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38375 \begin_inset Newline newline
38378 More information about this feature can be found in the
38384 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38390 \begin_layout Description
38391 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38393 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38394 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38398 \begin_layout Subsection
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38403 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38406 \begin_layout Description
38407 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38408 \begin_inset script superscript
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38419 \begin_layout Description
38420 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38421 \begin_inset script subscript
38423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38432 \begin_layout Description
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38437 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38444 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38451 \begin_layout Description
38453 \begin_inset space ~
38456 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38457 \begin_inset space ~
38461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38463 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38470 \begin_layout Description
38472 \begin_inset space ~
38475 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38476 \begin_inset space ~
38480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38482 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38489 \begin_layout Description
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38494 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38500 \begin_inset space \space{}
38503 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38504 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38513 To insert a fraction use the command
38518 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38522 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38531 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38538 \begin_layout Description
38540 \begin_inset space ~
38543 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38544 \begin_inset space ~
38548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38550 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38557 \begin_layout Description
38559 \begin_inset space ~
38562 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38563 \begin_inset space ~
38567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38569 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38576 \begin_layout Description
38578 \begin_inset space ~
38581 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38588 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38595 \begin_layout Description
38596 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38603 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38610 \begin_layout Description
38612 \begin_inset space ~
38615 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38616 \begin_inset space ~
38620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38622 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38629 \begin_layout Description
38631 \begin_inset space ~
38634 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38635 \begin_inset space ~
38639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38641 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38648 \begin_layout Description
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38654 \begin_inset space ~
38657 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38664 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38671 \begin_layout Description
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38676 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38677 as described in section
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38684 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38691 \begin_layout Description
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38696 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38697 \begin_inset space ~
38701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38703 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38710 \begin_layout Description
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38715 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38716 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38718 \begin_inset space ~
38722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38724 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38731 \begin_layout Description
38733 \begin_inset space ~
38736 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38737 \begin_inset space ~
38741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38743 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38750 \begin_layout Description
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38759 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38760 \begin_inset space ~
38764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38766 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38773 \begin_layout Subsection
38777 \begin_layout Standard
38778 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38803 are described in section
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38810 reference "sec:toc"
38819 is described in section
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38826 reference "sec:Index"
38834 is described in section
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38841 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38847 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38850 is described in section
38851 \begin_inset space ~
38855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38857 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38864 \begin_layout Subsection
38868 \begin_layout Standard
38869 To insert floats, as described in section
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38876 reference "sec:Floats"
38880 and in detail the chapter
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38895 \begin_layout Subsection
38899 \begin_layout Standard
38900 To insert notes, described in section
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38907 reference "sec:Notes"
38914 \begin_layout Subsection
38918 \begin_layout Standard
38919 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38921 Branches are described in section
38922 \begin_inset space ~
38926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38928 reference "sec:Branches"
38935 \begin_layout Subsection
38939 \begin_layout Standard
38940 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38941 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38943 An example is the document class
38944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38951 with three custom insets.
38954 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38958 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
38964 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
38967 \begin_layout Subsection
38969 \begin_inset Index idx
38972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 \begin_layout Standard
38982 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
38984 For more information see chapter
38986 External Document Parts
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38995 \begin_layout Subsection
38997 \begin_inset Index idx
39000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 \begin_layout Standard
39010 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39011 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39018 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_layout Subsection
39030 \begin_layout Standard
39035 dialog as described in section
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39042 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39049 \begin_layout Subsection
39053 \begin_layout Standard
39058 as described in section
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39065 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39072 \begin_layout Subsection
39076 \begin_layout Standard
39081 as described in section
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39088 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39095 \begin_layout Subsection
39097 \begin_inset Index idx
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39107 \begin_inset Index idx
39110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39119 \begin_layout Standard
39120 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39121 Floats are described in section
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39128 reference "sec:Floats"
39132 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39134 Multi-page Captions
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39147 \begin_layout Subsection
39151 \begin_layout Standard
39152 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39159 reference "sec:Index"
39166 \begin_layout Subsection
39170 \begin_layout Standard
39171 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39172 \begin_inset space ~
39176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39178 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39185 \begin_layout Subsection
39189 \begin_layout Standard
39190 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39191 Tables are described in section
39192 \begin_inset space ~
39196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39198 reference "sec:Tables"
39202 and in detail in the chapter
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \begin_layout Subsection
39221 \begin_layout Standard
39227 Graphics are described in section
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39234 reference "sec:Graphics"
39241 \begin_layout Subsection
39245 \begin_layout Standard
39246 Inserts a URL as described in section
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39253 reference "subsec:URLs"
39260 \begin_layout Subsection
39264 \begin_layout Standard
39265 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39272 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39279 \begin_layout Subsection
39283 \begin_layout Standard
39284 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39291 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39298 \begin_layout Subsection
39302 \begin_layout Standard
39303 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39310 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39317 \begin_layout Subsection
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39323 title or caption of a float.
39324 Inserts a short title as described in section
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39331 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39338 \begin_layout Subsection
39343 \begin_layout Standard
39344 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39345 Code box as described in section
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39352 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39359 \begin_layout Subsection
39361 \begin_inset Index idx
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 \begin_layout Standard
39374 Inserts a program listings box.
39375 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39377 Program Code Listings
39382 \begin_inset space ~
39390 \begin_layout Subsection
39394 \begin_layout Standard
39395 Inserts the actual date.
39396 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39401 \begin_layout Subsection
39405 \begin_layout Standard
39406 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39407 \begin_inset space ~
39411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39413 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39420 \begin_layout Section
39422 \begin_inset Index idx
39425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 \begin_layout Standard
39435 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39439 of the current document.
39440 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39443 \begin_layout Subsection
39447 \begin_layout Standard
39448 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39449 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39450 to jump, for example, between section
39451 \begin_inset space ~
39455 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39459 2.5 and use the submenu
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39473 \begin_inset space ~
39479 \begin_inset space ~
39483 \begin_inset space ~
39489 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39493 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39499 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39502 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39505 \begin_layout Standard
39506 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39510 \begin_inset space ~
39515 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39523 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39526 \begin_layout Subsection
39527 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39531 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39535 \begin_layout Subsection
39539 \begin_layout Standard
39540 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39541 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39542 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39558 \begin_layout Subsection
39562 \begin_layout Standard
39563 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39566 The \SpecialChar LyX
39567 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39577 \begin_inset space ~
39582 manual for a detailed description.
39585 \begin_layout Section
39587 \begin_inset Index idx
39590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39599 \begin_layout Subsection
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39604 Change Tracking is described in section
39605 \begin_inset space ~
39609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39611 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39618 \begin_layout Subsection
39626 \begin_layout Standard
39627 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39628 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39629 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39631 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39632 to the clipboard or update the view.
39633 \begin_inset Newline newline
39636 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39640 \begin_layout Standard
39643 Open Containing Directory
39645 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39646 's temporary folder for the document.
39647 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39648 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39649 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39650 For example some journals require to send the
39654 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39658 \begin_layout Subsection
39659 Start Appendix Here
39662 \begin_layout Standard
39663 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39664 as described in section
39665 \begin_inset space ~
39669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39671 reference "sec:Appendices"
39678 \begin_layout Subsection
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39686 \begin_layout Standard
39687 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39688 default output format for the document (menu
39690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39691 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39692 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39704 \begin_inset space ~
39708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39710 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39714 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39717 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39718 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39723 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39728 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39740 \begin_inset space ~
39744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39746 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39750 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39751 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39753 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39754 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39756 \begin_inset space ~
39759 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39764 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39768 \begin_inset space ~
39772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39774 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39779 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39780 when it is first configured.
39781 The default output format is
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39792 \begin_layout Subsection
39793 View (Other Formats)
39796 \begin_layout Standard
39797 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39798 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39799 actual document with an external program.
39800 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39801 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39802 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39804 All possible formats are listed in section
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39811 reference "subsec:Export"
39816 You should at least see the menu entry
39821 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39823 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39831 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39836 \begin_inset Index idx
39839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39840 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39849 \begin_layout Standard
39850 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39851 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39853 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39854 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39859 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39861 \begin_inset space ~
39864 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39874 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39879 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39880 when it is first configured.
39883 \begin_layout Subsection
39885 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39892 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39893 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39896 \begin_layout Subsection
39897 Update (Other Formats)
39900 \begin_layout Standard
39901 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39902 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39905 \begin_layout Subsection
39906 View Master Document
39909 \begin_layout Standard
39910 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39931 manual for more information on this topic).
39932 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39933 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39937 \begin_inset space ~
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39946 generates the output of the whole book, while
39950 will just output the chapter alone.
39953 \begin_layout Standard
39954 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39955 in the document settings (menu
39957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39958 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39959 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39971 \begin_inset space ~
39975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39977 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39981 ) or in the preferences (menu
39983 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39984 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39986 \begin_inset space ~
39989 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39994 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40012 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40019 \begin_layout Subsection
40020 Update Master Document
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40024 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40045 manual for more information on this topic).
40046 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40047 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40050 \begin_layout Standard
40051 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40052 in the document settings (menu
40054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40055 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40056 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40068 \begin_inset space ~
40072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40074 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40078 ) or in the preferences (menu
40080 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40081 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40086 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40091 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40093 \begin_inset space ~
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40109 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40116 \begin_layout Subsection
40118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40120 name "subsec:Compressed"
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40128 Un/compresses the current document.
40129 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40130 compression (see the
40132 Additional Features
40134 manual for details).
40137 \begin_layout Subsection
40141 \begin_layout Standard
40142 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40145 \begin_layout Subsection
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40150 The document settings are described in appendix
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40157 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40164 \begin_layout Section
40166 \begin_inset Index idx
40169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40178 \begin_layout Subsection
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 Spell checking is explained in section
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40197 \begin_layout Subsection
40201 \begin_layout Standard
40202 The thesaurus is described in section
40203 \begin_inset space ~
40207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40209 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40216 \begin_layout Subsection
40218 \begin_inset Index idx
40221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40228 \begin_inset Index idx
40231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40241 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40242 the highlighted document part.
40245 \begin_layout Subsection
40251 \begin_inset Index idx
40254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40255 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40264 \begin_layout Standard
40265 Generates with the help of the program
40267 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40270 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40271 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40272 This feature is not available on Windows.
40275 \begin_layout Subsection
40281 \begin_inset Index idx
40284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40294 \begin_layout Standard
40295 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40305 to see the full filename paths.
40308 \begin_layout Subsection
40310 \begin_inset Index idx
40313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40322 \begin_layout Standard
40323 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40324 files as described in section
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40331 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40338 \begin_layout Subsection
40340 \begin_inset Index idx
40343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40356 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40374 \begin_inset Index idx
40377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40378 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40387 \begin_layout Standard
40388 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40389 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40390 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40391 -packages and programs it needs; see
40393 \begin_inset space ~
40397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40399 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40406 \begin_layout Subsection
40410 \begin_layout Standard
40415 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40422 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40429 \begin_layout Section
40431 \begin_inset Index idx
40434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40443 \begin_layout Standard
40444 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40445 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40447 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40451 \begin_layout Standard
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40460 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40461 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40462 packages and classes found
40463 by \SpecialChar LyX
40465 \begin_inset space ~
40469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40471 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40478 \begin_layout Standard
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40487 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40492 \begin_layout Section
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40496 name "sec:Toolbars"
40503 \begin_layout Standard
40504 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40511 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40518 \begin_layout Standard
40519 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40520 This is described in the
40522 Additional Features
40527 \begin_layout Subsection
40529 \begin_inset Index idx
40532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40541 \begin_layout Standard
40542 \begin_inset Graphics
40543 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40552 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40576 \begin_inset Note Note
40579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40580 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40585 manual for more information.
40593 \begin_layout Standard
40594 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40600 \begin_layout Standard
40601 \begin_inset Tabular
40602 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40603 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40611 \begin_inset Graphics
40612 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40626 pull-down box for the environments
40639 \begin_layout Standard
40640 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40648 \begin_inset Tabular
40649 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40650 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40651 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40652 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40676 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40752 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40766 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40782 arg "spelling-continuously"
40790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40794 Spellcheck continuously
40800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40823 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40853 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40943 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40959 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
40967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40999 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41013 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41041 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41055 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41056 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41084 Emphasize text, function of the
41086 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41091 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 Set text to noun style, function of the
41123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41128 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41146 arg "textstyle-apply"
41154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41158 Format text using the current settings in the
41160 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41165 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41198 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41218 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41246 arg "tabular-insert"
41254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41276 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41288 Toggle outline window on/off,
41290 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41306 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41318 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41333 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41358 \begin_layout Subsection
41360 \begin_inset Index idx
41363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41372 \begin_layout Standard
41373 \begin_inset Graphics
41374 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41382 \begin_layout Standard
41383 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41389 \begin_layout Standard
41390 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41394 \begin_layout Standard
41395 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41401 \begin_layout Standard
41402 \begin_inset Tabular
41403 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41404 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41405 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41406 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41443 arg "layout Enumerate"
41451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41470 arg "layout Itemize"
41478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41524 arg "layout Description"
41532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 arg "depth-increment"
41559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 arg "depth-decrement"
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41627 arg "float-insert figure"
41635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41642 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41658 arg "float-insert table"
41666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41673 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41719 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41749 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41813 arg "nomencl-insert"
41821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41829 \begin_inset space ~
41838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41847 arg "footnote-insert"
41855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41877 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41926 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41928 \begin_inset space ~
41937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41946 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42020 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42040 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42055 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42071 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42085 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42086 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42106 arg "dialog-show character"
42114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42125 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 arg "layout-paragraph"
42149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42155 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42175 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42203 \begin_layout Subsection
42204 View/Update Toolbar
42205 \begin_inset Index idx
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42209 Toolbar ! View / Update
42217 \begin_layout Standard
42218 \begin_inset Graphics
42219 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42226 \begin_layout Standard
42227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42233 \begin_layout Standard
42234 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42238 \begin_layout Standard
42239 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42245 \begin_layout Standard
42246 \begin_inset Tabular
42247 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42248 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42250 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42290 arg "buffer-update"
42298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42320 arg "master-buffer-view"
42328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 arg "master-buffer-update"
42362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42368 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42392 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42407 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42408 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42409 Synchronize with Output
42415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42438 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42439 View (Other Formats)
42445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42452 arg "update-others"
42460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42467 Update (Other Formats)
42480 \begin_layout Standard
42481 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42485 \begin_layout Subsection
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42497 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42501 , the table toolbar
42502 \begin_inset Index idx
42505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42519 manual and the math macro toolbar
42520 \begin_inset Index idx
42523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42536 \begin_layout Chapter
42537 The Document Settings
42538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42540 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42545 \begin_inset Index idx
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42549 Document ! Settings
42557 \begin_layout Standard
42561 \begin_inset space ~
42566 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42567 is called with the menu
42569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42573 You can save your document settings as default with the
42575 Save as Document Defaults
42577 button in any dialog.
42578 This will create a template named
42582 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42583 when you create a new document without
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42592 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42593 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42597 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42598 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42599 to find the one you are looking for.
42600 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42601 the submenus of the dialog.
42603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42607 \begin_inset space \space{}
42611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42618 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42619 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42620 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42623 \begin_layout Section
42627 \begin_layout Standard
42628 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42630 Document classes are described in section
42631 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42637 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42645 \begin_layout Standard
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42654 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42659 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42660 as a layout for a document class.
42661 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42663 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42672 \begin_layout Standard
42673 Some classes use special class options by default.
42674 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42678 and you can decide to use them or not.
42679 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42680 recommended you leave them untouched.
42685 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42686 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42691 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42693 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42699 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42700 \begin_inset Newline newline
42705 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42708 \begin_inset Newline newline
42711 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42712 distribution, see section
42717 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42719 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42737 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42738 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42739 in the background if the child document
42740 is opened without its master.
42741 This way child documents are always compilable.
42742 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42749 \begin_inset space ~
42757 \begin_layout Standard
42758 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42769 \begin_inset Index idx
42772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 packages ! prettyref
42780 \begin_inset Index idx
42783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42785 packages ! refstyle
42790 for cross-references, see section
42791 \begin_inset space ~
42795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42797 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42804 \begin_layout Section
42808 \begin_layout Standard
42809 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42810 Please refer to the section
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42826 manual for details.
42829 \begin_layout Section
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 Modules are explained in section
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42841 reference "subsec:Modules"
42848 \begin_layout Section
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42860 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42867 \begin_layout Section
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 The document font settings are described in section
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42879 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42886 \begin_layout Section
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42891 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42908 and whether it should be a
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42916 can also be specified here.
42919 \begin_layout Standard
42920 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42921 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42922 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42924 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42930 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42933 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42934 justifies the text on screen.
42935 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42939 \begin_layout Section
42943 \begin_layout Standard
42944 This dialog is described in sections
42945 \begin_inset space ~
42949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42951 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42958 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
42965 \begin_layout Section
42969 \begin_layout Standard
42970 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42977 reference "subsec:Margins"
42984 \begin_layout Section
42986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42988 name "sec:Language-encodings"
42993 \begin_inset Index idx
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 Language ! Encoding
43005 \begin_layout Standard
43006 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43007 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43008 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43010 is always encoded in utf8).
43011 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43012 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43013 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43014 -command is not known for
43015 a particular character).
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43019 If you use the option
43024 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43025 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43026 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43028 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43029 exactly one encoding.
43030 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43033 \begin_layout Standard
43035 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43036 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43037 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43038 installation supports Unicode), choose
43039 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43040 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43041 is quite incomplete, so
43042 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43047 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43048 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43049 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43050 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43051 -commands is not used, because all
43052 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43053 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43054 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43055 , two new alternative engines
43056 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43058 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43060 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43063 \begin_inset space ~
43071 \begin_inset space ~
43079 \begin_inset space ~
43085 \begin_inset space ~
43089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43091 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43096 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43100 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43103 \begin_layout Standard
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43112 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43113 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43123 The possible settings are:
43126 \begin_layout Description
43127 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43129 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43130 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43134 \begin_inset space ~
43138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43140 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43147 \begin_layout Description
43148 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43149 format you will use.
43150 In many cases this will be
43155 \begin_inset Index idx
43158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43166 If the newer package
43171 \begin_inset Index idx
43174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43176 packages ! polyglossia
43181 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43182 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43183 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43185 this package will be used instead of
43192 \begin_layout Description
43194 \begin_inset space ~
43205 would be more appropriate.
43208 \begin_layout Description
43209 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43210 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43214 (for German texts), type in
43217 \begin_inset Newline newline
43222 usepackage{ngerman}
43225 \begin_layout Description
43226 None will not use a language package.
43227 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43230 \begin_layout Standard
43231 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43234 \begin_layout Description
43236 \begin_inset space ~
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43251 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43257 \begin_inset Index idx
43260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43262 packages ! inputenc
43268 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43269 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43270 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43274 \begin_layout Description
43275 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43277 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43278 commands, which may result in a big
43279 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43280 -commands are needed.
43283 \begin_layout Description
43285 \begin_inset space ~
43289 \begin_inset space ~
43292 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43295 \begin_layout Description
43297 \begin_inset space ~
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43304 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43307 \begin_layout Description
43309 \begin_inset space ~
43312 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43315 \begin_layout Description
43317 \begin_inset space ~
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43324 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43325 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43328 \begin_layout Description
43330 \begin_inset space ~
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43337 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43341 \begin_layout Description
43343 \begin_inset space ~
43347 \begin_inset space ~
43350 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43351 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43354 \begin_layout Description
43356 \begin_inset space ~
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43364 \begin_inset space ~
43367 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43374 \begin_layout Description
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43387 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43388 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43391 \begin_layout Description
43393 \begin_inset space ~
43397 \begin_inset space ~
43400 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43401 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43402 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43403 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43404 \begin_inset space ~
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43414 \begin_layout Description
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43420 \begin_inset space ~
43423 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43424 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43425 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43427 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43438 \begin_layout Description
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43447 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43450 \begin_layout Description
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_inset space ~
43459 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43462 \begin_layout Description
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43471 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43474 \begin_layout Description
43476 \begin_inset space ~
43479 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43482 \begin_layout Description
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43487 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43490 \begin_layout Description
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43499 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43502 \begin_layout Description
43504 \begin_inset space ~
43508 \begin_inset space ~
43514 \begin_layout Description
43516 \begin_inset space ~
43520 \begin_inset space ~
43523 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43526 \begin_layout Description
43528 \begin_inset space ~
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_layout Description
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43544 \begin_inset space ~
43547 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43553 \begin_inset Index idx
43556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43563 , when using this, set the document language to
43568 \begin_layout Description
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43574 \begin_inset space ~
43577 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43582 , when using this, set the document language to
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_layout Description
43593 \begin_inset space ~
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43600 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43606 \begin_inset Index idx
43609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43611 packages ! japanese
43616 , when using this, set the document language to
43621 \begin_layout Description
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43630 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43635 , when using this, set the document language to
43640 \begin_layout Description
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43649 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43654 , when using this, set the document language to
43659 \begin_layout Description
43661 \begin_inset space ~
43664 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43667 \begin_layout Description
43669 \begin_inset space ~
43673 \begin_inset space ~
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43680 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43683 \begin_layout Description
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43689 \begin_inset space ~
43693 \begin_inset space ~
43696 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43697 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43698 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43701 \begin_layout Description
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43713 \begin_layout Description
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43722 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43723 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43726 \begin_layout Description
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43735 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43741 \begin_inset Index idx
43744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43754 \begin_layout Description
43756 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43774 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43777 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43784 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43785 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43787 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43790 \begin_layout Description
43792 \begin_inset space ~
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43799 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43805 \begin_inset Index idx
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43818 \begin_layout Description
43820 \begin_inset space ~
43823 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43829 \begin_inset Index idx
43832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43834 packages ! inputenc
43840 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43844 \begin_layout Description
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43857 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_layout Description
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43877 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43878 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43879 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43883 \begin_layout Description
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43889 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43896 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43897 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43900 \begin_layout Section
43902 \begin_inset Index idx
43905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43912 \begin_inset Index idx
43915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43922 \begin_inset Index idx
43925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43926 Color ! Shaded boxes
43932 \begin_inset Index idx
43935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43936 Color ! Greyed-out notes
43944 \begin_layout Standard
43945 Here you can alter the font color for the
43949 (default: black), for
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43957 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
43961 (default: white) and for
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43974 sets the color back to the default.
43977 \begin_layout Standard
43978 Clicking any button showing
43986 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
43987 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
43988 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
43989 later more quickly.
43992 \begin_layout Standard
43993 Note, if you change the
43996 \begin_inset space ~
44001 font color and use the option
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44009 in the document settings under
44012 \begin_inset space ~
44017 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44024 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44031 \begin_layout Standard
44032 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44038 \begin_layout Standard
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44051 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44057 Code after a forced page break:
44060 \begin_layout Itemize
44061 For the page color:
44062 \begin_inset Newline newline
44069 pagecolor{color name}
44072 \begin_layout Itemize
44073 For the text color:
44074 \begin_inset Newline newline
44084 \begin_layout Standard
44085 You are restricted to one of
44121 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44128 \begin_inset space ~
44134 \begin_inset Newline newline
44137 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44138 names to refer to them:
44141 \begin_layout Itemize
44147 \begin_inset Newline newline
44152 page_backgroundcolor
44155 \begin_layout Itemize
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44165 \begin_inset Newline newline
44173 \begin_layout Itemize
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44183 \begin_inset Newline newline
44191 \begin_layout Itemize
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset Newline newline
44209 \begin_layout Standard
44210 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44229 \begin_layout Section
44233 \begin_layout Standard
44234 Here you can adjust the
44238 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44242 as described in section
44243 \begin_inset space ~
44247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44249 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44256 \begin_layout Section
44260 \begin_layout Standard
44261 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44267 \begin_inset Index idx
44270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 packages ! biblatex
44282 \begin_inset Index idx
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44297 \begin_inset Index idx
44300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44308 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44311 Sectioned bibliography
44313 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44319 \begin_inset Index idx
44322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44324 packages ! bibtopic
44334 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44335 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44339 for the generation of the bibliography.
44340 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44347 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44354 \begin_layout Section
44358 \begin_layout Standard
44359 Here you can define the
44363 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44365 \begin_inset space ~
44369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44371 reference "sec:Index"
44378 \begin_layout Section
44382 \begin_layout Standard
44383 The PDF properties are explained in section
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44390 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44397 \begin_layout Section
44401 \begin_layout Standard
44402 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44403 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44409 \begin_inset Index idx
44412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44424 \begin_inset Index idx
44427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44439 \begin_inset Index idx
44442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 \begin_inset Index idx
44457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44469 \begin_inset Index idx
44472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44474 packages ! mathdots
44484 \begin_inset Index idx
44487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44489 packages ! mathtools
44499 \begin_inset Index idx
44502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44514 \begin_inset Index idx
44517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44519 packages ! stackrel
44529 \begin_inset Index idx
44532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44534 packages ! stmaryrd
44544 \begin_inset Index idx
44547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44549 packages ! undertilde
44554 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44557 \begin_layout Description
44558 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44559 -errors in formulas,
44560 ensure that you have this enabled.
44563 \begin_layout Description
44564 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44565 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44566 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44570 \begin_layout Description
44571 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_layout Description
44587 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44602 \begin_layout Description
44603 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44614 \begin_layout Description
44615 mathtools is used for the math commands
44651 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44658 \begin_layout Description
44659 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44661 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44670 \begin_layout Description
44671 stackrel is used for the math command
44688 \begin_layout Description
44689 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44692 \begin_layout Description
44693 undertilde is used for the math command
44701 Accents for one Character
44710 \begin_layout Section
44714 \begin_layout Standard
44715 The float placement options are described in the section
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_layout Section
44738 \begin_layout Standard
44739 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44741 Program Code Listings
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44754 \begin_layout Section
44758 \begin_layout Standard
44759 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44767 set to be used and set the
44772 The itemize environment is described in section
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44779 reference "sec:Itemize"
44786 \begin_layout Standard
44787 You can furthermore specify a
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44795 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44796 command of the desired character.
44797 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44804 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44810 \begin_inset space \space{}
44814 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44824 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44825 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44828 \begin_layout Standard
44829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44837 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44838 -packages in the preamble (menu
44841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44851 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44855 usepackage{textcomp}
44858 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44862 usepackage{amssymb}
44872 \begin_layout Section
44876 \begin_layout Standard
44877 Branches are described in section
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44884 reference "sec:Branches"
44891 \begin_layout Section
44893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44895 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44902 \begin_layout Standard
44903 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44906 \begin_layout Description
44908 \begin_inset space ~
44912 \begin_inset space ~
44915 Format: The format that is used when you enter
44916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44935 View Master Document
44936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44943 Update Master Document
44944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44951 menu or the toolbar.
44952 The default is set in
44954 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44955 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44960 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44970 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44977 \begin_layout Description
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44983 \begin_inset space ~
44986 Output settings for the menu
44988 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44996 For a detailed description see section
44998 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45011 \begin_layout Description
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45020 Options offers settings for the export format
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45033 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45034 \begin_inset space ~
45037 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45046 settings are described in detail in section
45048 Math Output in XHTML
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45062 \begin_inset space ~
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45071 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45074 \begin_layout Description
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45081 Save transient properties
45083 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45084 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45085 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45089 \begin_layout Itemize
45090 the activation of change tracking
45093 \begin_layout Itemize
45094 the output of tracked changes
45097 \begin_layout Itemize
45098 the recording of the document directory path.
45101 \begin_layout Standard
45102 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45103 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45107 \begin_layout Section
45115 \begin_layout Standard
45116 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45118 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45120 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45122 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45126 \begin_layout Standard
45127 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45128 -syntax is given in section
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45135 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45142 \begin_layout Chapter
45148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45150 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45155 \begin_inset Index idx
45158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45167 \begin_layout Standard
45168 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45170 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45174 It has the following submenus.
45177 \begin_layout Section
45181 \begin_layout Subsection
45185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45186 User Interface File
45187 \begin_inset Index idx
45190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45191 Customization ! of toolbars
45197 \begin_inset Index idx
45200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 Customization ! of menus
45209 \begin_layout Standard
45210 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45211 interface (ui) file.
45212 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45220 \begin_layout Description
45225 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45228 \begin_layout Description
45235 the menu entries in popup context menus
45238 \begin_layout Description
45243 specifies the toolbar buttons
45246 \begin_layout Standard
45247 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45248 and edit the entries.
45251 \begin_layout Standard
45252 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45264 entries must be finished with an explicit
45289 and in the case of the
45290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45302 The syntax for the entries is:
45305 \begin_layout Standard
45306 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45335 \begin_layout Standard
45337 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45340 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45341 -functions are listed in the menu
45343 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45353 \begin_layout Standard
45354 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45360 \begin_layout Standard
45361 For example, assuming you use the menu
45363 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45366 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45370 \begin_layout Standard
45371 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45395 \begin_layout Standard
45397 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45412 to have the sixth bookmark.
45415 \begin_layout Standard
45419 \begin_inset space ~
45424 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45425 's toolbar buttons.
45426 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45430 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45445 Enable tool tips in main work area
45447 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45455 \begin_layout Standard
45460 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45461 should display in the menu
45463 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45473 \begin_layout Subsection
45477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45481 \begin_layout Standard
45484 Restore window layouts and geometries
45487 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45488 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45492 \begin_layout Standard
45495 Restore cursor positions
45497 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45504 Load opened files from last session
45506 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45510 \begin_layout Standard
45513 Clear all session information
45515 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45516 sessions (cursor positions, names
45517 of last opened documents, etc.).
45520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45524 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45529 \begin_inset Index idx
45532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45541 \begin_layout Standard
45544 Backup original documents when saving
45546 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45547 it was saved the last time.
45548 It is stored in the
45551 \begin_inset space ~
45557 \begin_inset space ~
45561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45563 reference "sec:Paths"
45567 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45576 The backup file has the file extension
45577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45591 \begin_layout Standard
45594 Backup documents, every
45596 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45599 \begin_layout Standard
45602 Save documents compressed by default
45604 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45605 \begin_inset space ~
45609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45611 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45616 This applies to newly created documents only.
45617 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45621 Windows & work area
45624 \begin_layout Standard
45627 Open documents in tabs
45629 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45633 \begin_layout Standard
45638 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45651 reference "sec:Paths"
45655 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45662 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45663 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45664 of \SpecialChar LyX
45666 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45667 instance is created for each file.
45670 \begin_layout Standard
45673 Single close-tab button
45675 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45685 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45686 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45687 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45691 \begin_layout Standard
45692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45700 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45701 before the change takes effect.
45709 \begin_layout Standard
45714 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45716 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45718 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45722 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45723 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45724 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45727 \begin_layout Subsection
45729 \begin_inset Index idx
45732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45741 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45748 \begin_layout Standard
45749 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45753 \begin_layout Standard
45754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 This section only deals with the fonts
45766 the \SpecialChar LyX
45768 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45772 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45783 \begin_layout Standard
45784 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45801 (depends on the system) as its
45804 \begin_inset space ~
45820 \begin_layout Standard
45821 You can change the font size with the
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45833 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45838 points have the size of 1
45839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45843 \begin_inset space ~
45847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45849 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45854 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45859 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45860 \begin_inset space ~
45864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45866 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45873 \begin_layout Standard
45876 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45878 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45879 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45880 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45881 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45882 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45884 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45891 \begin_layout Subsection
45893 \begin_inset Index idx
45896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45904 \begin_inset Index idx
45907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 \begin_layout Standard
45917 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
45918 by choosing an item in the
45919 list and selecting the
45926 \begin_layout Standard
45927 By checking the option
45931 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
45934 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
45935 \begin_inset space ~
45939 \begin_inset space ~
45944 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
45947 \begin_layout Subsection
45949 \begin_inset Index idx
45952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45962 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
45966 \begin_layout Standard
45971 enables previewing snippets of your document.
45972 This feature is described in section
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45979 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
45986 \begin_layout Standard
45987 Checking the option
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45994 \begin_inset space ~
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46003 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46006 \begin_layout Section
46008 \begin_inset Index idx
46011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46020 \begin_layout Subsection
46024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46028 \begin_layout Standard
46031 Cursor follows scrollbar
46033 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46038 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46039 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46040 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46043 \begin_layout Standard
46046 Scroll below end of document
46048 is self-explanatory.
46051 \begin_layout Standard
46052 In \SpecialChar LyX
46053 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46060 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46062 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46063 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46066 \begin_layout Standard
46069 Sort environments alphabetically
46071 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46074 \begin_layout Standard
46077 Group environments by their category
46079 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46082 \begin_layout Standard
46087 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46102 \begin_layout Standard
46103 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46108 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46109 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46113 \begin_layout Subsection
46115 \begin_inset Index idx
46118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 \begin_inset Index idx
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 Settings ! Shortcuts
46137 \begin_layout Standard
46142 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46144 Several binding files are available, among them:
46147 \begin_layout Description
46148 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46151 \begin_layout Description
46152 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46164 \begin_layout Description
46165 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46176 \begin_layout Standard
46177 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46182 , and binding files for special languages.
46183 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46188 \begin_inset space \space{}
46192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46200 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46201 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46202 will try to use the appropriate binding
46206 \begin_layout Standard
46207 Some binding files, like
46211 , only have a limited scope.
46212 When looking at the end of the file
46216 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46219 \begin_layout Standard
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46227 \begin_inset space ~
46232 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46233 in the selected key binding file.
46236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46240 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46245 \begin_inset Index idx
46248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46249 Key Bindings ! Editing
46257 \begin_layout Standard
46258 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46259 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46260 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46261 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46264 Show key-bindings containing
46267 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46268 Insert there for example as keyword
46269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46276 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46277 functions that contain
46278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46286 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46287 All \SpecialChar LyX
46288 functions are also listed in the file
46293 that you will find in the
46300 \begin_layout Standard
46301 For example, to add the shortcut
46309 , select the function and press the
46314 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46315 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46318 \begin_layout Standard
46319 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46320 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46322 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46323 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46325 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46330 \begin_layout Standard
46331 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46334 \begin_layout Standard
46335 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46337 The syntax of the entries is:
46340 \begin_layout Standard
46346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46365 \begin_layout Subsection
46367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46369 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46374 \begin_inset Index idx
46377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 \begin_inset Index idx
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46388 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46396 \begin_layout Standard
46397 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46398 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46399 provides keyboard maps.
46400 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46401 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46404 \begin_inset space ~
46408 \begin_inset space ~
46413 and select the keyboard map file named
46420 \begin_layout Standard
46429 keyboard map and, if you use the
46433 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46436 arg "keymap-primary"
46442 arg "keymap-secondary"
46445 respectively or toggle between them with
46448 arg "keymap-toggle"
46454 \begin_layout Standard
46455 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46463 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46472 \begin_layout Standard
46473 You can also specify the mouse
46475 Wheel scrolling speed
46478 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46482 Middle mouse button pasting
46484 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46485 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46488 \begin_layout Standard
46496 \begin_inset space ~
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46505 you can select a key for zooming.
46506 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46509 \begin_layout Subsection
46513 \begin_layout Standard
46514 Input completion is described in section
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46521 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46528 \begin_layout Section
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46537 \begin_inset Index idx
46540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46547 \begin_inset Index idx
46550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46559 \begin_layout Standard
46560 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46561 are normally determined during
46563 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46566 \begin_layout Description
46568 \begin_inset space ~
46571 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46572 's working directory.
46573 It is the default when you
46584 \begin_inset space ~
46592 \begin_layout Description
46594 \begin_inset space ~
46597 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46599 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46601 \begin_inset space ~
46605 \begin_inset space ~
46613 \begin_layout Description
46615 \begin_inset space ~
46618 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46624 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46628 \begin_inset Newline newline
46632 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46644 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46645 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46653 \begin_layout Description
46655 \begin_inset space ~
46659 \begin_inset Index idx
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46668 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46669 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46670 \begin_inset space ~
46674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46676 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46684 will be used to save the backups.
46685 \begin_inset Newline newline
46688 Backup files have the ending
46689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46699 \begin_layout Description
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46704 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46705 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46707 \begin_inset Newline newline
46714 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46720 You can edit this file with the program
46729 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46730 in its preferences under
46733 \begin_inset space ~
46739 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46744 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46746 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46747 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46753 and \SpecialChar LyX
46754 need to be running the same time.
46755 \begin_inset Newline newline
46758 The pipe is also used for the
46762 feature, see section
46763 \begin_inset space ~
46767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46769 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46774 \begin_inset Newline newline
46777 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46778 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46779 \begin_inset Newline newline
46795 \begin_layout Description
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46800 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46803 \begin_layout Description
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46808 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46809 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46810 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46813 \begin_layout Description
46815 \begin_inset space ~
46818 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46824 You only need to specify it if you are using
46828 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46830 For \SpecialChar LyX
46835 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46839 \begin_layout Description
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46844 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46845 When \SpecialChar LyX
46846 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46847 to find it on the system.
46848 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46850 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46859 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46860 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46863 \begin_layout Description
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46868 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46869 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46870 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46871 code or in the document
46873 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46875 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46876 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46877 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46878 scanned for the input files.
46879 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46880 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46882 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46883 compilation may fail for some documents.
46886 \begin_layout Section
46890 \begin_layout Standard
46891 Here you can insert your
46900 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46902 \begin_inset space ~
46906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46908 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46912 , to mark changes you make as yours.
46915 \begin_layout Section
46917 \begin_inset Index idx
46920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46921 Language ! Settings
46927 \begin_inset Index idx
46930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 Settings ! Language
46939 \begin_layout Subsection
46941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46943 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46950 \begin_layout Description
46952 \begin_inset space ~
46956 \begin_inset space ~
46959 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
46961 You can find its actual translation status here:
46962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46964 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
46972 \begin_layout Description
46974 \begin_inset space ~
46977 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
46978 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
46979 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
46980 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
46981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46997 The most widespread language package is
47002 \begin_inset Index idx
47005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47012 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47014 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47015 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47016 come with the alternative
47022 \begin_inset Index idx
47025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47027 packages ! polyglossia
47032 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47033 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47039 The available selections are described in section
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47046 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47053 \begin_layout Description
47055 \begin_inset space ~
47058 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47059 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47060 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47061 An example is the start command
47067 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47069 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47089 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47094 \begin_layout Description
47096 \begin_inset space ~
47104 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47105 command toggles the package on and off.
47108 \begin_layout Description
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47117 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47121 \begin_layout Description
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47127 \begin_inset space ~
47130 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47134 \begin_layout Description
47136 \begin_inset space ~
47140 \begin_inset space ~
47143 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47144 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47145 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47147 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47154 \begin_layout Description
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47159 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47161 When this option is not set, the
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47169 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47171 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47182 \begin_layout Description
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47190 \begin_inset space ~
47196 When it is not set, the
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47204 is set to the end of the document.
47207 \begin_layout Description
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47216 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47217 language will be underlined in blue.
47220 \begin_layout Description
47222 \begin_inset space ~
47226 \begin_inset space ~
47229 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47230 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47233 \begin_layout Description
47235 \begin_inset space ~
47238 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47239 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47240 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47241 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47244 \begin_layout Subsection
47248 \begin_layout Standard
47249 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47250 \begin_inset space ~
47254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47256 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47263 \begin_layout Section
47267 \begin_layout Subsection
47269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47271 name "subsec:General-output"
47278 \begin_layout Description
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47283 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47285 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47287 \begin_inset space ~
47293 For a detailed description see section
47295 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47300 \begin_inset space ~
47308 \begin_layout Description
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47313 Options Options for the program
47317 that is used for the export format
47322 \begin_inset space ~
47326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47328 reference "subsec:Export"
47333 Possible options are listed in the
47338 \begin_inset Newline newline
47342 \begin_inset Flex URL
47345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47347 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47357 \begin_layout Description
47359 \begin_inset space ~
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47366 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47369 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47370 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47372 \begin_inset space ~
47378 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47381 \begin_layout Description
47383 \begin_inset space ~
47387 \begin_inset Index idx
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47397 \begin_inset Index idx
47400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47401 Settings ! Date format
47406 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47407 \begin_inset Newline newline
47411 \begin_inset Flex URL
47414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47416 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47422 \begin_inset Newline newline
47425 For example the format
47426 \begin_inset Newline newline
47430 \begin_inset Newline newline
47433 prints the date as day/month/year.
47436 \begin_layout Description
47438 \begin_inset space ~
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47445 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47446 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47449 \begin_layout Subsection
47455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47457 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47462 \begin_inset Index idx
47465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47466 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47475 \begin_layout Description
47477 \begin_inset space ~
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47492 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47497 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47518 are used for Cyrillic.
47519 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47532 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47534 sets up in the background.
47535 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47538 \begin_layout Description
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47544 \begin_inset space ~
47548 \begin_inset space ~
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47555 options They only have an effect when the program
47559 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47562 \begin_layout Standard
47563 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47564 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47565 manuals of the applications.
47568 \begin_layout Description
47570 \begin_inset space ~
47573 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47574 \begin_inset space ~
47578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47580 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47587 \begin_layout Description
47589 \begin_inset space ~
47592 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47593 \begin_inset space ~
47597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47599 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47606 \begin_layout Description
47608 \begin_inset space ~
47611 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47612 \begin_inset space ~
47616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47618 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47625 \begin_layout Description
47631 \begin_inset space ~
47634 command Command for the program
47636 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47639 that is described in the section
47641 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47646 Additional Features
47651 \begin_layout Standard
47652 There are additionally the following options:
47655 \begin_layout Description
47657 \begin_inset space ~
47661 \begin_inset space ~
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47674 \begin_inset space ~
47677 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47695 to separate folders.
47696 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47698 \begin_inset Index idx
47701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47708 \begin_inset Index idx
47711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47720 \begin_layout Description
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47726 \begin_inset space ~
47730 \begin_inset space ~
47734 \begin_inset space ~
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47745 changes Removes all manually set
47751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47759 dialog when changing the document class.
47762 \begin_layout Section
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47768 \begin_inset Index idx
47771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47780 \begin_layout Subsection
47782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47784 name "subsec:Converters"
47789 \begin_inset Index idx
47792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47801 \begin_layout Standard
47802 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47803 from one format to another.
47804 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47805 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47812 \begin_inset space ~
47817 field and press the
47822 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47831 drop-down list, modify the
47835 field and press the
47842 \begin_layout Standard
47845 Converter File Cache
47851 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47853 Maximum Age (in days
47856 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47857 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47860 \begin_layout Standard
47861 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47862 definition, is described in the section
47873 \begin_layout Subsection
47875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47877 name "sec:File-Formats"
47882 \begin_inset Index idx
47885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47892 \begin_inset Index idx
47895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47905 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
47915 programs that should be used for certain formats.
47918 \begin_layout Standard
47919 You can also define the
47921 Default output format
47923 that is used when you use
47925 View, Update, View Master Document
47929 Update Master Document
47935 menu or the toolbar.
47938 \begin_layout Standard
47939 More about formats and their options is described in the section
47950 \begin_layout Standard
47951 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
47953 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
47954 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
47955 This is done by specifying a
47960 More about this is described in the section
47971 \begin_layout Chapter
47972 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47974 \begin_inset Index idx
47977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47986 name "chap:Units-available-in"
47993 \begin_layout Standard
47995 \begin_inset space ~
47999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48001 reference "tab:Units"
48005 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48006 and used in this documentation.
48009 \begin_layout Standard
48010 \begin_inset Float table
48016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48017 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48035 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48043 \begin_inset Tabular
48044 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48045 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48046 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48254 scaled point (65536
48255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48333 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48406 % of original image width
48411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48722 \begin_layout Chapter
48724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48726 name "chap:Credits"
48733 \begin_layout Standard
48734 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48735 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48738 \begin_layout Itemize
48741 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48744 \begin_layout Itemize
48750 \begin_layout Itemize
48756 \begin_layout Itemize
48762 \begin_layout Itemize
48768 \begin_layout Itemize
48774 \begin_layout Itemize
48780 \begin_layout Itemize
48786 \begin_layout Itemize
48789 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48792 \begin_layout Itemize
48798 \begin_layout Itemize
48804 \begin_layout Itemize
48810 \begin_layout Itemize
48816 \begin_layout Itemize
48822 \begin_layout Itemize
48828 \begin_layout Itemize
48834 \begin_layout Itemize
48840 \begin_layout Itemize
48841 The \SpecialChar LyX
48843 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48853 \begin_layout Standard
48854 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48857 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48864 \begin_layout Bibliography
48865 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48866 LatexCommand bibitem
48873 The \SpecialChar LyX
48875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48878 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48884 \begin_inset Newline newline
48888 \begin_inset Flex URL
48891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48893 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48901 \begin_layout Bibliography
48902 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48903 LatexCommand bibitem
48904 key "latexcompanion"
48909 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
48911 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48912 Companion Second Edition.
48915 Addison-Wesley, 2004
48918 \begin_layout Bibliography
48919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48920 LatexCommand bibitem
48926 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
48929 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48933 Addison-Wesley, 2003
48936 \begin_layout Bibliography
48937 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48938 LatexCommand bibitem
48947 : A Document Preparation System.
48950 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
48953 \begin_layout Bibliography
48954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48955 LatexCommand bibitem
48965 The \SpecialChar TeX
48969 Addison-Wesley, 1984
48972 \begin_layout Bibliography
48973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48974 LatexCommand bibitem
48980 The \SpecialChar TeX
48982 \begin_inset Newline newline
48986 \begin_inset Flex URL
48989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
48999 \begin_layout Bibliography
49000 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49001 LatexCommand bibitem
49007 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49009 \begin_inset Newline newline
49013 \begin_inset Flex URL
49016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49018 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49026 \begin_layout Bibliography
49027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49028 LatexCommand bibitem
49035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49037 name "Documentation"
49038 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49045 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49049 \begin_inset Newline newline
49053 \begin_inset Flex URL
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49058 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49066 \begin_layout Bibliography
49067 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49068 LatexCommand bibitem
49075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49077 name "Documentation"
49078 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49083 how to use the program
49085 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49089 \begin_inset Newline newline
49093 \begin_inset Flex URL
49096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49098 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49106 \begin_layout Bibliography
49107 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49108 LatexCommand bibitem
49115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49117 name "Documentation"
49118 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49123 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49129 \begin_inset Index idx
49132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49134 packages ! biblatex
49140 \begin_inset Newline newline
49144 \begin_inset Flex URL
49147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49149 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49157 \begin_layout Bibliography
49158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49159 LatexCommand bibitem
49166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49168 name "Documentation"
49169 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49174 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49180 \begin_inset Index idx
49183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49191 \begin_inset Newline newline
49195 \begin_inset Flex URL
49198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49200 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49208 \begin_layout Bibliography
49209 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49210 LatexCommand bibitem
49217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49219 name "Documentation"
49220 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49230 \begin_inset Newline newline
49234 \begin_inset Flex URL
49237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49239 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49247 \begin_layout Bibliography
49248 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49249 LatexCommand bibitem
49250 key "makeindex-man"
49256 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49259 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49269 \begin_inset Newline newline
49273 \begin_inset Flex URL
49276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49278 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49286 \begin_layout Bibliography
49287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49288 LatexCommand bibitem
49295 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49297 name "Documentation"
49298 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49308 \begin_inset Newline newline
49312 \begin_inset Flex URL
49315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49317 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49325 \begin_layout Bibliography
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49327 LatexCommand bibitem
49334 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49336 name "Documentation"
49337 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49342 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49344 \begin_inset Newline newline
49348 \begin_inset Flex URL
49351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49353 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49361 \begin_layout Bibliography
49362 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49363 LatexCommand bibitem
49370 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49372 name "Documentation"
49373 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49378 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49384 \begin_inset Index idx
49387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49395 \begin_inset Newline newline
49399 \begin_inset Flex URL
49402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49404 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49412 \begin_layout Bibliography
49413 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49414 LatexCommand bibitem
49421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49423 name "Documentation"
49424 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49429 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49435 \begin_inset Index idx
49438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49440 packages ! enumitem
49446 \begin_inset Newline newline
49450 \begin_inset Flex URL
49453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49455 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49463 \begin_layout Bibliography
49464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49465 LatexCommand bibitem
49472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49474 name "Documentation"
49475 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49480 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49486 \begin_inset Index idx
49489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49491 packages ! fancyhdr
49497 \begin_inset Newline newline
49501 \begin_inset Flex URL
49504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49506 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49514 \begin_layout Bibliography
49515 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49516 LatexCommand bibitem
49523 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49525 name "Documentation"
49526 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49531 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49537 \begin_inset Index idx
49540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49542 packages ! hyperref
49548 \begin_inset Newline newline
49552 \begin_inset Flex URL
49555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49557 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49565 \begin_layout Bibliography
49566 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49567 LatexCommand bibitem
49574 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49576 name "Documentation"
49577 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49582 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49588 \begin_inset Index idx
49591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49599 \begin_inset Newline newline
49603 \begin_inset Flex URL
49606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49608 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49616 \begin_layout Bibliography
49617 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49618 LatexCommand bibitem
49625 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49627 name "Documentation"
49628 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49633 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49639 \begin_inset Index idx
49642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49644 packages ! prettyref
49650 \begin_inset Newline newline
49654 \begin_inset Flex URL
49657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49659 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49667 \begin_layout Bibliography
49668 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49669 LatexCommand bibitem
49676 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49678 name "Documentation"
49679 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49684 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49690 \begin_inset Index idx
49693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49695 packages ! refstyle
49701 \begin_inset Newline newline
49705 \begin_inset Flex URL
49708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49710 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49718 \begin_layout Bibliography
49719 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49720 LatexCommand bibitem
49727 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49730 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49735 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49737 \begin_inset Newline newline
49741 \begin_inset Flex URL
49744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49746 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49754 \begin_layout Bibliography
49755 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49756 LatexCommand bibitem
49763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49766 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49771 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49773 \begin_inset Newline newline
49777 \begin_inset Flex URL
49780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49782 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49790 \begin_layout Bibliography
49791 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49792 LatexCommand bibitem
49799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49802 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49807 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49808 for Cyrillic languages:
49809 \begin_inset Newline newline
49813 \begin_inset Flex URL
49816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49818 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49826 \begin_layout Bibliography
49827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49828 LatexCommand bibitem
49835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49838 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49843 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49845 \begin_inset Newline newline
49849 \begin_inset Flex URL
49852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49854 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49862 \begin_layout Bibliography
49863 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49864 LatexCommand bibitem
49871 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49874 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49879 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49881 \begin_inset Newline newline
49885 \begin_inset Flex URL
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49890 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49898 \begin_layout Bibliography
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49900 LatexCommand bibitem
49907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49910 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49915 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49917 \begin_inset Newline newline
49921 \begin_inset Flex URL
49924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49926 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49934 \begin_layout Bibliography
49935 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49936 LatexCommand bibitem
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49946 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49951 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49953 \begin_inset Newline newline
49957 \begin_inset Flex URL
49960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49962 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
49970 \begin_layout Bibliography
49971 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49972 LatexCommand bibitem
49979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49982 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
49987 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49989 \begin_inset Newline newline
49993 \begin_inset Flex URL
49996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49998 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50006 \begin_layout Bibliography
50007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50008 LatexCommand bibitem
50015 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50018 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50023 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50025 \begin_inset Newline newline
50029 \begin_inset Flex URL
50032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50034 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50042 \begin_layout Bibliography
50043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50044 LatexCommand bibitem
50051 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50054 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50059 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50061 \begin_inset Newline newline
50065 \begin_inset Flex URL
50068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50070 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50078 \begin_layout Bibliography
50079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50080 LatexCommand bibitem
50087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50090 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50095 about new features in
50101 \begin_inset Newline newline
50105 \begin_inset Flex URL
50108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50110 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50118 \begin_layout Standard
50119 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50153 \begin_inset Note Note
50156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50163 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50164 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50165 bibliography is the second one:
50173 \begin_layout Standard
50174 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50175 LatexCommand bibtex
50176 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50177 options "biblio/alphadin"
50184 \begin_layout Standard
50185 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50189 \begin_layout Standard
50190 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50191 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50197 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50198 LatexCommand printindex